WO2024198973A1 - Positioning method and apparatus - Google Patents
Positioning method and apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2024198973A1 WO2024198973A1 PCT/CN2024/081923 CN2024081923W WO2024198973A1 WO 2024198973 A1 WO2024198973 A1 WO 2024198973A1 CN 2024081923 W CN2024081923 W CN 2024081923W WO 2024198973 A1 WO2024198973 A1 WO 2024198973A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- identification information
- positioning
- information
- terminal device
- anchor
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W64/00—Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a positioning method and device.
- the sidelink (SL) in the cellular vehicle-to-everything application is one of the focuses of current positioning research, which complements the enhancement functions such as improving positioning integrity and accuracy.
- the terminal device to be positioned needs to first complete the ProSe direct discovery (ProSe direct discovery) and terminal direct communication interface (PC5) link establishment processes with multiple roadside units (RSUs), and then complete the transmission and measurement of positioning-related signaling through PC5 unicast or multicast communication.
- the terminal device to be positioned must perform ProSe discovery and establish PC5 links with different RSUs, which makes the signaling overhead and positioning delay of sidelink positioning large.
- the present application provides a positioning method and apparatus, which can reduce the signaling overhead required for a terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, can also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with a first device, and can also reduce positioning delay.
- a positioning method which is applied to a first device, and the method includes: obtaining first identification information, the first identification information is used to identify a terminal device, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device; based on the first identification information, receiving a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device; and performing positioning measurement based on the side positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result.
- the first device can obtain a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device based on the first identification information without establishing a communication connection with the terminal device, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
- the first device also performs positioning measurements based on the side positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result, which means that the above implementation is a positioning scenario, and therefore, the positioning delay can also be reduced.
- the first device can be used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device.
- the first identification information may be an identification of a terminal device, such as layer 1 identification (L1 ID), layer 2 identification (L2 ID) or layer 3 identification (L3 ID). It may also be called a source identification, such as source L1 ID, source L2 ID or source L3 ID.
- L1 ID layer 1 identification
- L2 ID layer 2 identification
- L3 ID layer 3 identification
- source identification such as source L1 ID, source L2 ID or source L3 ID.
- the communication link involved in this application may refer to a side link, a PC5 link or a PC5 connection.
- a communication link is not established between the terminal device and the first device, it can be understood that a side link, a PC5 link or a PC5 connection is not established between the terminal device and the first device.
- the sidelink positioning reference signal involved in this application is used for positioning, such as positioning reference signal (PRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS) or sidelink synchronization signal (SLSS).
- PRS can also be called sidelink positioning reference signal (SL-PRS).
- the first measurement result may, for example, include at least one of the following: relative time of arrival (RTOA) from the terminal device to the first device, time of arrival (TOA), angle of arrival (AOA), reference signal received power (RSRP), reference signal received path power (RSRPP), path arrival time (relative of path arrival), angle of arrival (angle of path arrival), reference signal Doppler component (reference signal doppler component), reference signal path Doppler component (reference signal path doppler component), terminal device speed (UE velocity), etc.
- RTOA relative time of arrival
- TOA time of arrival
- AOA reference signal received power
- RSRPP reference signal received path power
- path arrival time relative of path arrival
- angle of arrival angle of path arrival
- reference signal Doppler component reference signal doppler component
- reference signal path Doppler component reference signal path doppler component
- terminal device speed UE velocity
- RTOA refers to the time when the receiving end receives the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located relative to the RTOA reference time.
- ToA refers to the time when the receiving end receives the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located;
- AOA refers to the time when the reference signal is located relative to the reference direction.
- RSRP refers to the mean of the received signal power on the resource unit carrying the reference signal within the measurement time and measurement bandwidth configured for the reference signal.
- RSRPP refers to the mean of the received power of the resource unit carrying the reference signal on a certain delay path of the transmission channel within the measurement time and measurement bandwidth configured for the reference signal, wherein the RSRPP of the first delay path is the corresponding mean of the received power on the first detected (i.e., first detected) transmission path.
- Path arrival time refers to the time when the receiving end receives the corresponding received component of the reference signal on a certain path of the transmission channel. The time can be the time relative to the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located, the time relative to ToA, or the time relative to the arrival time of a certain path.
- Path arrival angle refers to the azimuth and vertical angle of the reference signal on a certain transmission path relative to the reference direction.
- the reference signal Doppler component refers to the arrival phase difference of the reference signal obtained by two consecutive measurements by the receiving end when the reference signal arrival time and arrival angle are given.
- the reference signal path Doppler component refers to the arrival phase difference of the reference signal on the transmission path obtained by two consecutive measurements by the receiving end under the condition of the arrival time and arrival angle of the reference signal transmission path.
- the terminal device speed refers to the speed of the target device (such as the terminal device of this application) measured by the receiving end based on the reference signal, including direction and size information.
- obtaining the first identification information includes: receiving the first identification information from a second device or a positioning server.
- the second device may be used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device.
- the method also includes: obtaining sidelink control information (SCI) corresponding to the sidelink positioning reference signal; receiving the sidelink positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information, including: when the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, receiving the sidelink positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
- SCI sidelink control information
- the first device when the second identification information included in the SCI corresponding to the sideline positioning reference signal is the same as the first identification information, the first device can receive the sideline positioning reference signal from the terminal device, thereby avoiding the situation where the first device erroneously receives the sideline positioning reference signal.
- the second identification information can be the identification of the terminal device, such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID.
- the method also includes: receiving third identification information from a second device or a positioning server, the third identification information being used to identify the second device, a device group or a broadcast address where the second device is located; the SCI also includes fourth identification information, receiving a side positioning reference signal from a terminal device, including: when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, receiving a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
- the first device when the second identification information included in the SCI corresponding to the sideline positioning reference signal is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information included in the SCI is the same as the third identification information, the first device can receive the sideline positioning reference signal from the terminal device, thereby avoiding the situation where the first device erroneously receives the sideline positioning reference signal.
- the third identification information may be an identification of the second device, such as L1 ID, L2 ID, or L3 ID, etc. It may also be called a destination identification, such as a destination L1 ID, a destination L2 ID, or a destination L3 ID, etc.
- the fourth identification information may be an identification of the second device.
- the third identification information may be the group identification of the group to which the second device belongs.
- the fourth identification information may be the group identification of the group to which the second device belongs.
- the third identification information When the third identification information is used to identify a broadcast address, the third identification information may be broadcast address information.
- the fourth identification information may be broadcast address information.
- the method before receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information, the method further includes: receiving a first measurement request from the second device or the positioning server, the first measurement request being used to indicate a first positioning type, such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, terminal device speed, etc. from the terminal device to the first device.
- a first positioning type such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, terminal device speed, etc.
- the method further includes: sending the first measurement result to the second device or the positioning server, so that the second device or the positioning server can obtain the first measurement result, and then determine the location information of the terminal device according to the first measurement result.
- the method further includes: sending an identifier of the first device to the second device.
- the identifier of the first device can be L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID, etc.
- a positioning method which is applied to a second device, and the method includes: receiving first identification information from a terminal device, the first identification information is used for the first device to perform positioning measurement, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device; and sending the first identification information to the first device.
- the second device can obtain the first identification information from the terminal device, and then send the first identification information to the first device, so that when the first device has not established a communication connection with the terminal device, the first device can obtain the side positioning reference signal of the terminal device according to the first identification information and perform positioning measurement, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also The signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device is reduced.
- the method also includes: determining at least one first device from multiple first candidate devices based on prior information between the second device and multiple first candidate devices; wherein the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the second device and the first candidate device, historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the second device and the first candidate device.
- the speed at which the second device determines at least one first device can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
- the location of the first candidate device involved in the present application may include at least one of the following: the longitude and latitude coordinates of the first candidate device or the longitude and latitude coordinate interval value of the longitude and latitude coordinates.
- the location of the first candidate device involved in the present application may include at least one of the following: the cell where the first candidate device is located or the tracking area where the first candidate device is located.
- the location of the first candidate device involved in the present application may be the relative position of the first candidate device, such as the direction and distance of the first candidate device relative to the second device, or the direction and distance of the first candidate device relative to a base station (the base station may or may not cover the second device).
- the communication connection relationship between the second device and any one of the multiple first candidate devices may include a previously established communication connection or a previously unestablished communication connection.
- the communication connection relationship between the second device and any one of the multiple first candidate devices may include an established communication connection or a previously unestablished communication connection.
- the historical unicast context information corresponding to each of the multiple first candidate devices may include at least one of the following: an identifier of the first candidate device (such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID of the first candidate device), a historical service type identifier between the second device and the multiple first candidate devices, a vehicle to everything (V2X) service quality characteristic identifier corresponding to the historical sidelink between the second device and the multiple first candidate devices, etc.
- an identifier of the first candidate device such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID of the first candidate device
- V2X vehicle to everything
- the historical multicast context information corresponding to each of the multiple first candidate devices may include at least one of the following: a group identifier of the group to which the first candidate device belongs, a historical service type identifier between the second device and the multiple first candidate devices, and a V2X service quality characteristic identifier corresponding to the historical sidelink between the second device and the multiple first candidate devices.
- the historical service type identifier involved in this application can be used to identify the V2X service type on the PC5 link, such as positioning service information or road warning information, etc.
- the service quality characteristic identifier can be used to identify the service quality of the PC5 link, such as scheduling priority, etc.
- the channel conditions involved in the present application may include, for example, at least one of the following: reference signal received power (RSRP), reference signal received quality (RSRQ), signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), path loss or path type.
- RSRP reference signal received power
- RSRQ reference signal received quality
- SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
- path loss or path type includes line of sight (LOS) and/or non-line of sight (NLOS).
- the method further includes: receiving first information from a terminal device, the first information being used to request determination of a first device. This reminds the second device to determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device, and also indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, thereby reducing the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery and also reducing positioning delay.
- the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; and sending the first identifier information, the identifier of the first device, and third identifier information to a positioning server, wherein the third identifier information is used to identify the second device, the device group or the broadcast address to which the second device belongs.
- the positioning server to know which devices are involved in positioning the terminal device, and then to send corresponding measurement requests to these devices.
- the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; and sending the first identifier information and the identifier of the first device to the positioning server. This enables the positioning server to learn the identifier of the first device, and then send a corresponding measurement request to the first device according to the identifier of the first device.
- the method before sending the first identification information and the identification of the first device to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a first request message from the positioning server, where the first request message is used to request the identification of the first device.
- the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; and sending the identifier of the first device to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can know that the devices involved in positioning include the first device.
- the method further includes: sending third identification information to the first device or the terminal device, where the third identification information is used to identify the second device, a device group to which the second device belongs, or a broadcast address.
- the method further includes: receiving, according to the first identification information, a sidewalk positioning reference signal; perform positioning measurement according to the sidewalk positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result. This indicates that the second device can perform positioning measurement on the terminal device according to the sidewalk positioning reference signal.
- the second measurement result includes at least one of the following: one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, terminal device speed, etc. from the terminal device to the second device.
- the method also includes: obtaining the SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal; receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information, including: when the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
- the second device when the second identification information included in the SCI corresponding to the sideline positioning reference signal is the same as the first identification information, the second device can receive the sideline positioning reference signal from the terminal device, thereby avoiding the situation where the second device erroneously receives the sideline positioning reference signal.
- the SCI also includes fourth identification information, and receives a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device, including: when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
- the method before performing positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result, the method further includes: receiving a second measurement request from the positioning server, the second measurement request is used to indicate a second positioning type. For example, one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, terminal device speed, etc. from the terminal device to the second device. This allows the second device to know what the corresponding positioning types are.
- the method further includes: receiving a first measurement result from the first device; determining location information of the terminal device according to the second measurement result and the first measurement result; and sending the location information of the terminal device to the terminal device. This indicates that the second device can determine the location of the terminal device according to each measurement result.
- the method further includes: sending a first measurement request to the first device, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type, so that the first device can learn which corresponding positioning types there are.
- a positioning method which is applied to a terminal device, and the method includes: generating first identification information, the first identification information is used for a first device to perform positioning measurement, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device; and sending the first identification information to a second device or a positioning server.
- the terminal device can send the first identification information to the second device or the positioning server, so that the first device can obtain the first identification information through the second device or the positioning server, and then when the first device does not establish a communication connection with the terminal device, the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device can be obtained according to the first identification information and the positioning measurement can be performed, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
- the method further includes: sending first information to the second device or the positioning server, where the first information is used to request to determine the first device. This reminds the second device or the positioning server to determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device, and also indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, thereby reducing the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery and reducing the positioning delay.
- the method further includes: receiving third identification information from the second device, the third identification information being used to identify the second device, the device group or the broadcast address to which the second device belongs; and sending the third identification information to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can learn the third identification information.
- the method before sending the third identification information to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a second request message from the positioning server, the second request message being used to request the third identification information. This indicates that the terminal device may send the third identification information to the positioning server after receiving the second request message.
- the method when sending the first information to the second device, further includes: receiving the identification and third identification information of the first device from the second device, the third identification information being used to identify the second device, the device group or the broadcast address to which the second device belongs; and sending the identification and third identification information of the first device to the positioning server.
- the terminal device can send the identification and third identification information of the first device to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can know which devices are involved in positioning the terminal device, and then can send corresponding measurement requests to these devices.
- the method before sending the identifier and third identifier information of the first device to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a third request message from the positioning server, the third request message being used to request the identifier and third identifier information of the first device. This indicates that the terminal device may send the identifier and third identifier information of the first device to the positioning server after receiving the third request message.
- the method further includes: sending a sideways positioning reference signal, the sideways positioning reference signal The signal is used by the first device and the second device to perform positioning measurement.
- the method further includes: receiving location information of a terminal device from a second device.
- a positioning method which is applied to a positioning server, and the method includes: receiving first identification information from a terminal device, the first identification information is used to identify the terminal device, no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device, and the first device is used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device; sending the first identification information to the first device.
- the positioning server obtains the first identification information and sends the first identification information to the first device, so that the first device can obtain the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information when the communication connection with the terminal device is not established, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
- the method further includes: receiving first information from a terminal device, the first information being used to request determination of a first device; and determining the first device.
- the positioning server can determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device, and also indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, thereby reducing the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, and also reducing the positioning delay.
- the method also includes: receiving third identification information from a terminal device, the third identification information is used to identify a second device, a device group or a broadcast address where the second device is located, and the second device is used to perform positioning measurements on the terminal device; determining, based on the third identification information, prior information between the second device and a plurality of first candidate devices; determining the first device, including: determining the first device from a plurality of first candidate devices based on the prior information.
- the speed at which the positioning server determines the first device can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
- the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the second device and the first candidate device, the historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the second device and the first candidate device.
- the method further includes: sending third identification information to the first device.
- a positioning method is provided, which is applied to a second device, and the method includes: receiving first information from a terminal device, the first information is used to request the determination of a first device, the first device is used to perform positioning measurements on the terminal device, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device; determining the first device.
- the second device can determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device, which indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, which reduces the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery and also reduces the positioning delay.
- no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device, which can reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
- determining the first device includes: determining the first device from multiple first candidate devices based on prior information between the second device and the multiple first candidate devices; wherein the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the second device and the first candidate device, historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the second device and the first candidate device.
- the speed at which the second device determines the first device can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
- the method further includes: receiving first identification information from a terminal device, the first identification information being used to identify the terminal device; and sending the first identification information to the first device.
- the second device can obtain the first identification information from the terminal device, and then send the first identification information to the first device, so that when the first device does not establish a communication connection with the terminal device, the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device can be obtained according to the first identification information, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
- the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; and sending the first identifier information, the identifier of the first device, and third identifier information to a positioning server, wherein the third identifier information is used to identify the second device, the device group or the broadcast address to which the second device belongs.
- the positioning server to know which devices are involved in positioning the terminal device, and then to send corresponding measurement requests to these devices.
- the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device;
- the positioning server sends the first identification information and the identification of the first device, so that the positioning server can learn the identification of the first device, and then send a corresponding measurement request to the first device according to the identification of the first device.
- the method before sending the first identification information and the identification of the first device to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a first request message from the positioning server, where the first request message is used to request the identification of the first device.
- the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; and sending the identifier of the first device to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can know that the devices involved in positioning include the first device.
- the method further includes: sending third identification information to the first device or the terminal device, where the third identification information is used to identify the second device, the device group to which the second device belongs, or the broadcast address.
- the method further includes: receiving a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information; and performing positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result. This indicates that the second device can perform positioning measurement on the terminal device according to the side positioning reference signal.
- the method also includes: obtaining the SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal; receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information, including: when the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
- the second device when the second identification information included in the SCI corresponding to the sideline positioning reference signal is the same as the first identification information, the second device can receive the sideline positioning reference signal from the terminal device, thereby avoiding the situation where the second device erroneously receives the sideline positioning reference signal.
- the SCI also includes fourth identification information, and receives a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device, including: when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
- the method before performing positioning measurement according to the sideways positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result, the method further includes: receiving a second measurement request from a positioning server, the second measurement request being used to indicate a second positioning type. This enables the second device to know which corresponding positioning types are.
- the method further includes: receiving a first measurement result from the first device; determining location information of the terminal device according to the second measurement result and the first measurement result; and sending the location information of the terminal device to the terminal device. This indicates that the second device can determine the location of the terminal device according to each measurement result.
- the method further includes: sending a first measurement request to the first device, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type, so that the first device can learn which corresponding positioning types there are.
- a positioning method which is applied to a terminal device, and the method includes: generating first information, the first information is used to request to determine a first device, and the first device is used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device; and sending the first information to a second device or a positioning server.
- the terminal device can send the first information to the second device or the positioning server, so that the second device or the positioning server can determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device after obtaining the first information. This indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, which reduces the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery and also reduces the positioning delay.
- the method further includes: sending first identification information to the second device or the positioning server, where the first identification information is used to identify the terminal device, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device.
- the terminal device can send the first identification information to the second device or the positioning server, so that the first device can obtain the first identification information through the second device or the positioning server without establishing a communication connection with the terminal device, and then can obtain the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device based on the first identification information, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
- the method further includes: receiving third identification information from the second device, the third identification information being used to identify the second device, a device group or a broadcast address to which the second device belongs; and sending the third identification information to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can learn the third identification information.
- the method before sending the third identification information to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a second request message from the positioning server, where the second request message is used to request the third identification information. This indicates that the terminal device may send the third identification information to the positioning server after receiving the second request message.
- the method when sending the first information to the second device, further includes: receiving the identification and third identification information of the first device from the second device, the third identification information being used to identify the second device, the device group or the broadcast address to which the second device belongs; and sending the identification and third identification information of the first device to the positioning server.
- the terminal device can send the identification and third identification information of the first device to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can know which devices are involved in positioning the terminal device, and can then send corresponding measurement requests to these devices.
- the method before sending the identifier and third identifier information of the first device to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a third request message from the positioning server, where the third request message is used to request the identifier and third identifier information of the first device. This indicates that the terminal device may send the identifier and third identifier information of the first device to the positioning server after receiving the third request message.
- the method further includes: sending a sideways positioning reference signal, where the sideways positioning reference signal is used for the first device and the second device to perform positioning measurements.
- the method further includes: receiving location information of a terminal device from a second device.
- a positioning method which is applied to a positioning server, and the method includes: receiving first information from a terminal device, the first information is used to request to determine a first device, and the first device is used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device; and determining the first device.
- the positioning server can receive the first information. After obtaining the first information, the positioning server can determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device, which indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, thereby reducing the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery and also reducing the positioning delay.
- the method also includes: receiving third identification information from a terminal device, the third identification information is used to identify a second device, a device group or a broadcast address where the second device is located, and the second device is used to perform positioning measurements on the terminal device; determining, based on the third identification information, prior information between the second device and a plurality of first candidate devices; determining the first device, including: determining the first device from a plurality of first candidate devices based on the prior information.
- the speed at which the positioning server determines the first device can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
- the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the second device and the first candidate device, the historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the second device and the first candidate device.
- the method further includes: sending third identification information to the first device.
- the method also includes: receiving first identification information from a terminal device, the first identification information is used to identify the terminal device, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device; and sending the first identification information to the first device.
- the positioning server can obtain the first identification information from the terminal device, and then send the first identification information to the first device, so that the first device can obtain the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information when the communication connection with the terminal device is not established, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
- a communication device comprising a unit or module for implementing the method as described in any one of the first to seventh aspects.
- a communication device comprising at least one processor and a memory; wherein the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions; and at least one processor is used to execute the computer programs or instructions in the memory, so that any method described in any one of the first aspect to the eighth aspect is executed.
- a communication system comprising a first device, a second device and a terminal device; the first device is used to execute a method as described in any one of the first aspect; the second device is used to execute a method as described in any one of the second aspect or the fifth aspect; the terminal device is used to execute a method as described in any one of the third aspect or the sixth aspect.
- a communication system comprising a first device, a terminal device and a positioning server; the first device is used to execute a method as described in any one of the first aspect; the terminal device is used to execute a method as described in any one of the third aspect or the sixth aspect; the positioning server is used to execute a method as described in any one of the fourth aspect or the seventh aspect.
- a computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed, the computer executes the method as described in any one of aspects 1 to 7.
- a computer program product comprising: a computer program code, when the computer program code is executed by a computer, the computer executes a method as described in any one of the first to seventh aspects.
- a chip is provided, which is coupled to a memory and is used to read and execute program instructions in the memory so that the device where the chip is located implements the method described in any possible implementation method of the first to seventh aspects.
- FIG1 is a basic architecture of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a specific possible network architecture applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of a positioning method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of another positioning method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of another positioning method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of a positioning method under network coverage provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG7 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of a positioning method without network coverage provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG8 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of another positioning method under network coverage provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG9 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG10 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a simplified UE provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- references to "one embodiment” or “some embodiments” etc. described in the embodiments of the present application mean that one or more embodiments of the present application include specific features, structures or characteristics described in conjunction with the embodiment. Therefore, the statements “in one embodiment”, “in some embodiments”, “in some other embodiments”, “in some other embodiments”, etc. that appear in different places in this specification do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment, but mean “one or more but not all embodiments", unless otherwise specifically emphasized in other ways.
- the terms “including”, “comprising”, “having” and their variations all mean “including but not limited to”, unless otherwise specifically emphasized in other ways.
- Figure 1 is an infrastructure of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication system may include at least one first device (Figure 1 only shows two first devices, namely, the first device 101 and the first device 102) and a second device 103. Among them, the first device 101 and the first device 102 can perform side link communication with the second device 103.
- the communication system may also include a terminal device 104. The terminal device 104 can perform side link communication with the second device 103. No communication link is established between the terminal device 104 and the first device 101 and the first device 102.
- the communication system may also include a network device 105 and a positioning server 106, and the first device 101, the first device 102, the second device 103 and the terminal device 104 may also communicate with the positioning server 106 through the network device 105.
- the communication system may further include an access and mobility management device 107.
- the network device 105 may respectively send various signaling and/or data from the first device 101, the first device 102, the second device 103 and the terminal device 104 to the positioning server 106 through the access and mobility management device 107, and may also respectively send various signaling and/or data from the positioning server 106 to the first device 101, the first device 102, the second device 103 and the terminal device 104 through the access and mobility management device 107.
- the communication system may include at least one first device (FIG. 1 only shows two first devices, namely, the first device 111 and the first device 112) and a second device 113.
- the first device 111 and the first device 112 may perform sidelink communication with the second device 113.
- the communication system may further include a terminal device 114.
- the terminal device 114 may perform sidelink communication with the second device 113. No communication link is established between the terminal device 114 and the first device 111 and the first device 112.
- Fig. 1 is only an example and should not be regarded as a specific limitation of the present application.
- the first device is an entity on the user side that is used to receive signals, or send signals, or receive and send signals.
- the first device is used to provide one or more of voice services and data connectivity services to the user.
- the first device can be a device that includes wireless transceiver functions and A device that can cooperate with a network device to provide communication services to a user.
- the first device may refer to user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, user device or road side unit (RSU).
- UE user equipment
- RSU road side unit
- the first device may also be a drone, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, a station (ST) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a cellular phone, a smart phone, a cordless phone, a wireless data card, a tablet computer, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA) device, a laptop computer, a machine type communication (MTC) terminal, a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device (also referred to as a wearable smart device), a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in self driving, a wireless terminal in transportation safety, a wireless terminal in a smart city, a wireless terminal in a smart home, etc.
- the first device may also be a terminal in a 5G system or a terminal in
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the device form of the first device.
- the device for implementing the function of the first device may be the first device; or it may be a device that can support the first device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
- the device may be installed in the first device or used in combination with the first device.
- the chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices.
- the first device involved in the present application can be used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device.
- the second device is an entity on the user side for receiving signals, or sending signals, or receiving signals and sending signals.
- the second device is used to provide one or more of voice services and data connectivity services to users.
- the second device can be a device that includes wireless transceiver functions and can cooperate with network equipment to provide communication services to users.
- the second device can refer to UE, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, user device or RSU.
- the second device can also be a drone, IoT device, ST in WLAN, cellular phone, smart phone, cordless phone, wireless data card, tablet computer, SIP phone, WLL station, PDA device, laptop, MTC terminal, handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, vehicle-mounted device, wearable device (also called wearable smart device), VR terminal, AR terminal, wireless terminal in industrial control, wireless terminal in unmanned driving, wireless terminal in transportation safety, wireless terminal in smart city, wireless terminal in smart home, etc.
- the second device may also be a terminal in a 5G system or a terminal in a next generation communication system, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
- the second device may be referred to as an anchor device.
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the device form of the second device.
- the device for realizing the function of the second device may be the second device; or it may be a device that can support the second device to realize the function, such as a chip system.
- the device may be installed in the second device or used in combination with the second device.
- the chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices.
- the second device involved in the present application can be used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device.
- the terminal device is an entity on the user side for receiving signals, or sending signals, or receiving and sending signals.
- the terminal device can be used to provide one or more of voice services and data connectivity services to users.
- the terminal device can be a device that includes wireless transceiver functions and can cooperate with network devices to provide communication services to users.
- the terminal device can refer to UE, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, user device or RSU.
- the terminal device can also be a drone, IoT device, ST in WLAN, cellular phone, smart phone, cordless phone, wireless data card, tablet computer, SIP phone, WLL station, PDA device, laptop, MTC terminal, handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, vehicle-mounted device, wearable device (also called wearable smart device), VR terminal, AR terminal, wireless terminal in industrial control, wireless terminal in unmanned driving, wireless terminal in transportation safety, wireless terminal in smart city, wireless terminal in smart home, etc.
- the terminal device may also be a terminal in a 5G system or a terminal in a next-generation communication system, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the device form of the terminal.
- the device for realizing the function of the terminal device can be a terminal device; it can also be a device that can support the terminal device to realize the function, such as a chip system.
- the device can be installed in the terminal device or used in combination with the terminal device.
- the chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices.
- a network device is an entity on the network side that is used to send signals, or receive signals, or both send and receive signals.
- a network device can be a device deployed in a radio access network (RAN) to provide wireless communication functions for terminal devices, such as For example, it can be a transmission reception point (TRP), a base station, or various forms of control nodes.
- RAN radio access network
- TRP transmission reception point
- base station a base station
- control nodes for example, a network controller, a wireless controller, or a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario.
- CRAN cloud radio access network
- the network device can be various forms of macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, access points (APs), radio network controllers (RNCs), node Bs (NBs), base station controllers (BSCs), base transceiver stations (BTSs), home base stations (e.g., home evolved node Bs, or home node Bs, HNBs), baseband units (BBUs), transmission points (TRPs), transmission points (TPs), mobile switching centers, satellites, or drones, or antenna panels of base stations.
- the control node can connect to multiple base stations and configure resources for multiple terminals covered by multiple base stations. In systems using different wireless access technologies, the names of devices with base station functions may be different.
- the network device can be a gNB in 5G, or a network-side device in a network after 5G, or a network device in a future evolved public land mobile (communication) network (public land mobile network, PLMN) network, or a device that performs base station functions in device-to-device (D2D) communication, machine-to-machine (M2M) communication, and vehicle networking communication, etc.
- PLMN public land mobile network
- D2D device-to-device
- M2M machine-to-machine
- vehicle networking communication etc.
- the network device can also be an open access network (open RAN, O-RAN or ORAN), a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN), etc.
- the network device may be a centralized unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), a CU-control plane (CP), a CU-user plane (UP), or a radio unit (RU).
- the CU and DU may be set separately, or may be included in the same network element, such as a BBU.
- the RU may be included in a radio frequency device or a radio frequency unit, such as a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH).
- RRU remote radio unit
- AAU active antenna unit
- RRH remote radio head
- the network device may be a CU node, a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node.
- the CU may be divided into a network device in the access network RAN, or the CU may be divided into a network device in the core network CN, without limitation here.
- CU or CU-CP and CU-UP
- DU or RU may also have different names, but those skilled in the art can understand their meanings.
- CU may also be called O-CU (open CU)
- DU may also be called O-DU
- CU-CP may also be called O-CU-CP
- CU-UP may also be called O-CU-UP
- RU may also be called O-RU.
- CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU and RU are described as examples in this application.
- Any unit of CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU and RU in this application may be implemented by a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.
- the positioning server is used to provide the interaction of the information required for positioning by selecting the corresponding positioning method according to the positioning accuracy requirements, delay requirements, etc., and selecting the corresponding communication protocol, and is used to provide other information required for positioning services, or positioning strategies.
- the positioning server can be an evolved serving mobile location center (E-SMLC).
- E-SMLC evolved serving mobile location center
- 5G communications the positioning server can be a location management function (LMF) network element.
- LMF location management function
- future communications such as the 6th generation (6G) communications, the positioning server can still be an LMF network element, or have other names, and this application does not limit this.
- the access and mobility management device is mainly used for the registration, mobility management, and tracking area update process of terminal devices in the mobile network.
- the access and mobility management device terminates the non-access stratum (NAS) message, completes registration management, connection management, and reachability management, allocates the tracking area list (TA list) and mobility management, and transparently routes the session management (SM) message to the session management network element.
- the access and mobility management device can be an access and mobility management function (AMF) network element.
- Namf is a service-based interface provided by the AMF network element.
- the AMF network element can communicate with other network functions through Namf.
- future communications such as the 6th generation (6G) communication, the access and mobility management device can still be an AMF network element, or have other names, which is not limited in this application.
- the network structure may include the above-mentioned LMF network element, AMF network element, gNB (or ng-eNB), terminal equipment (such as UE1 in Figure 2), a first device (such as UE2 in Figure 2) and a second device (such as UE3 in Figure 2), etc.
- the gNB may include multiple transmission points (TP). It should be noted that the gNB may also include multiple reception points (RP). It can also be understood that the gNB may include multiple transmission and reception points (TRP).
- the NL1 interface is a reference point between the AMF network element and the LMF network element
- the NG-C interface is a reference point between the gNB (or ng-eNB) and the AMF network element, which is used for the transmission of NAS messages and next generation application protocol (NGAP) messages.
- the AMF network element receives a positioning service request for a UE (such as UE1) initiated by other network elements in the network.
- the AMF network element sends the received request to the LMF network element, which is responsible for processing the received positioning request and initiating the relevant positioning process.
- gNB communicates with UE2, UE3, etc. through the air interface.
- the air interface is a name, and the air interface can be a communication interface between a network device and a terminal device.
- the air interface is called the Uu interface (i.e., the LTE Uu interface in Figure 2); in 5G, the air interface is called the new radio (NR) (i.e., the NR Uu interface in Figure 2).
- NR new radio
- UE1 and UE3 communicate through the PC5 interface
- UE2 and UE3 communicate through the PC5 interface.
- AMF network elements can also use service-oriented interfaces for interaction.
- the service-oriented interface provided by AMF network elements to the outside world can be Namf.
- control plane and user plane of the LMF network element are the evolved serving mobile location center (ESMLC) and the secure user plane positioning platform (SUPL location platform, SLP), which can realize the interaction of various types of information with gNB/ng-eNB, UE1, UE2 and UE3.
- EMLC evolved serving mobile location center
- SLP secure user plane positioning platform
- network elements or functions shown in Figures 1 and 2 can be network elements in hardware devices, software functions running on dedicated hardware, or virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud platform).
- a platform e.g., a cloud platform
- the above-mentioned network elements or functions can be implemented by one device, or by multiple devices together, or can be a functional module within a device, and the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
- “network element” can be omitted.
- the LMF network element in the embodiment of the present application expresses the same meaning as LMF, but for the convenience of description, the two words "network element” are omitted, and the rest are similar.
- the communication systems shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 do not constitute a limitation on the communication systems to which the embodiments of the present application can be applied. Therefore, the communication method provided in the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to communication systems of various standards, such as: long term evolution (LTE) communication system, 5G communication system, 6G communication system and future communication system, V2X, LTE-vehicle (LTE-V), vehicle to vehicle (V2V), vehicle networking, machine type communications (MTC), IoT, LTE-machine to machine (LTE-M), M2M, Internet of Things, etc.
- LTE long term evolution
- 5G communication system 5G communication system
- V2X LTE-vehicle
- V2V vehicle to vehicle
- vehicle networking machine type communications
- MTC machine type communications
- IoT LTE-machine to machine
- LTE-M LTE-machine to machine
- M2M Internet of Things
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit
- the positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below in conjunction with FIG. 1 and FIG. 2.
- the following text takes the network device, the positioning server, and the access and mobility management device as the gNB, LMF, and AMF in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, respectively, as an example for explanation.
- the terminal device, the first device, and the second device mentioned in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 may be referred to as the target UE, the additional anchor UE, and the initialing anchor UE, respectively.
- a positioning method is provided in an embodiment of the present application, and the positioning method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
- Additional anchor UE obtains first identification information and/or third identification information, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE. No communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE.
- the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located.
- the additional anchor UE may receive the first identification information and/or the third identification information from the initialing anchor UE. In another possible implementation, the additional anchor UE may receive the first identification information and/or the third identification information from the LMF.
- the first identification information may be an identification of the target UE, such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID. It may also be called a source identification, such as source L1 ID, source L2 ID or source L3 ID.
- the third identification information may be an identification of the initialing anchor UE, such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID. It may also be called a destination identification, such as destination L1 ID, destination L2 ID or destination L3 ID.
- the third identification information may be a group identification of the group to which the initialing anchor UE belongs.
- the third identification information may be broadcast address information.
- the first identification information is used to identify the target UE, which can be understood as the first identification information being used to correctly receive signals and/or data from the target UE, such as being used for one or more additional anchor UEs to correctly receive signals and/or data from the target UE.
- the identification pair composed of the first identification information and the third identification information is used to correctly receive the signal and/or data from the target UE, such as being used for one or more additional anchor UEs to correctly receive the signal and/or data from the target UE.
- the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE
- any one of the L1 ID, L2 ID and L3 ID of the target UE can form the identification pair with any one of the L1 ID, L2 ID and L3 ID of the initialing anchor UE.
- the identification pair is also used to identify the link between the initialing anchor UE and the target UE, such as a unicast link or a unicast connection.
- any one of the L1 ID, L2 ID and L3 ID of the target UE can form the identification pair with the group identifier of the group to which the initialing anchor UE belongs. At this time, the identification pair is also used to identify the link between the initialing anchor UE and the target UE, such as a multicast link or a multicast connection.
- the third identification information is used to identify the broadcast address
- any one of the L1 ID, L2 ID and L3 ID of the target UE can form the identification pair with the broadcast address information.
- the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or the broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located. It can be understood that the third identification information is used to correctly receive the signal and/or data from the target UE, such as used for one or more additional anchor UEs to correctly receive the signal and/or data from the target UE.
- the communication link involved in this application may refer to a side link, a PC5 link or a PC5 connection.
- a side link For example, if no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE, it can be understood that no side link, a PC5 link or a PC5 connection is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE.
- the first identification information and/or the third identification information may be used for additional anchor UE to perform positioning measurements, such as performing positioning measurements on a terminal device.
- the first identification information and/or the third identification information may also be used for initialing anchor UE to perform positioning measurements, such as performing positioning measurements on a terminal device.
- the additional anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information and/or the third identification information.
- the target UE sends a side positioning reference signal to the additional anchor UE.
- the side positioning reference signal involved in the present application is used for positioning, such as PRS, DMRS or SLSS.
- PRS can also be called SL-PRS.
- the method also includes: obtaining the SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal.
- the SCI may include second identification information and/or fourth identification information.
- the second identification information may be an identification of the target UE.
- the fourth identification information may be an identification of the initialing anchor UE.
- the fourth identification information may be a group identification of the group to which the initialing anchor UE belongs.
- the fourth identification information may be broadcast address information.
- the additional anchor UE When the additional anchor UE obtains the first identification information, when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, the additional anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
- the additional anchor UE When the additional anchor UE obtains the first identification information and the third identification information, when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, the additional anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
- the additional anchor UE When the additional anchor UE obtains the third identification information, when the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, the additional anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
- the additional anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result. For example, the additional anchor UE performs positioning measurement on the target UE according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain the first measurement result.
- the first measurement result can be at least one of the following: RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from target UE to additional anchor UE.
- RTOA refers to the time when the receiving end receives the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located relative to the RTOA reference time.
- ToA refers to the time when the receiving end receives the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located;
- AOA refers to the azimuth and vertical angle of the reference signal relative to the reference direction.
- RSRP refers to the mean of the received signal power on the resource unit carrying the reference signal within the measurement time and measurement bandwidth configured by the reference signal.
- RSRPP refers to the mean of the received power of the resource unit carrying the reference signal on a certain delay path of the transmission channel within the measurement time and measurement bandwidth configured by the reference signal, wherein the RSRPP of the first delay path is the corresponding mean of the received power on the first detected (i.e., first detected) transmission path.
- Path arrival time refers to the time when the receiving end receives the corresponding received component of the reference signal on a certain path of the transmission channel. The time can be the time relative to the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located, the time relative to ToA, or the time relative to the arrival time of a certain path.
- Path arrival angle refers to the azimuth and vertical angle of the reference signal on a certain transmission path relative to the reference direction.
- the reference signal Doppler component refers to the arrival phase difference of the reference signal obtained by two consecutive measurements at the receiving end given the arrival time and arrival angle of the reference signal.
- the reference signal path Doppler component refers to the arrival phase difference of the reference signal on the transmission path obtained by two consecutive measurements at the receiving end given the arrival time and arrival angle of the reference signal transmission path.
- the target UE speed refers to the speed of the target device (such as the target UE in this application) measured by the receiving end based on the reference signal, including direction and size information.
- the method further includes: the additional anchor UE receives a first measurement request (measurement request) from the initialing anchor UE or the LMF, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type, such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the additional anchor UE.
- a first positioning type such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc.
- the first measurement result is consistent with the first positioning type. For example, if the first positioning type is RTOA from the target UE to the additional anchor UE, the first measurement result is RTOA. For another example, if the first positioning type includes AOA, RSRP, RSRPP and path arrival time, the first measurement result
- the target UE's ProSe direct discovery process and the process of establishing a communication connection between the target UE and the additional anchor UE are reduced. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to establish a communication connection with the additional anchor UE. At the same time, the positioning delay can also be reduced.
- the method further includes: the additional anchor UE sends a first measurement result to the initialing anchor UE or the LMF. Specifically, in the case where the additional anchor UE obtains the first measurement request from the initialing anchor UE, the additional anchor UE sends the first measurement result to the initialing anchor UE. In the case where the additional anchor UE obtains the first measurement request from the LMF, the additional anchor UE sends the first measurement result to the LMF. This allows the initialing anchor UE or the LMF to obtain the first measurement result, and then determine the location information of the target UE based on the first measurement result.
- the present application also provides an embodiment shown in FIG4 , which may include the following steps:
- the target UE generates first identification information, and the first identification information is used for the additional anchor UE to perform positioning measurement. No communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE.
- step 301 in Figure 3 please refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here.
- the target UE sends the first identification information to the initialing anchor UE.
- the initialing anchor UE receives the first identification information from the target UE.
- the method further includes: the target UE determines the initialing anchor UE. For example, the target UE determines a second candidate anchor UE with the best channel condition among the multiple second candidate anchor UEs as the initialing anchor UE based on the channel condition between the target UE and the multiple second candidate devices (referred to as second candidate anchor UEs).
- the target UE determines the initialing anchor UE. For example, the target UE determines a second candidate anchor UE with the best channel condition among the multiple second candidate anchor UEs as the initialing anchor UE based on the channel condition between the target UE and the multiple second candidate devices (referred to as second candidate anchor UEs).
- the channel conditions involved in the present application may include, for example, at least one of the following: RSRP, RSRQ, path loss, or path type.
- the path type includes LOS and/or NLOS.
- the SINR of candidate anchor UE1 is greater than the SINR of candidate anchor UE2, and the SINR of candidate anchor UE2 is greater than the SINR of candidate anchor UE3.
- the path loss of candidate anchor UE1 is less than the path loss of candidate anchor UE2, and the path loss of candidate anchor UE2 is less than the path loss of candidate anchor UE3.
- the path type of candidate anchor UE1 is LOS, the path type of candidate anchor UE2 is LOS, and the path type of candidate anchor UE3 is NLOS.
- the channel condition of candidate anchor UE1 is the best, so the target UE uses candidate anchor UE1 as the initialing anchor UE.
- the first identification information may be carried in a direct link establishment request (directlinkestablishmentrequest) message, where the direct link establishment request message is used to request establishment of a sidelink between the target UE and the initialing anchor UE.
- direct link establishment request directlinkestablishmentrequest
- This application does not limit the process of establishing a sidelink between the target UE and the initialing anchor UE.
- step 402 may be an optional step. For example, if the additional anchor UE may receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the third identification information, in this case, step 402 may not be performed.
- step 403 may be performed; or steps 404 to 406 may be performed.
- step 403 is regarded as one implementation mode, such as mode 1, and steps 404 to 406 are regarded as another implementation mode, such as mode 2.
- the initialing anchor UE sends the first identification information and/or the third identification information to the additional anchor UE.
- the additional anchor UE receives the first identification information and/or third identification information from the initialing anchor UE.
- the third identification information can refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here.
- the initialing anchor UE sends the third identification information to the target UE.
- the target UE receives the third identification information from the initialing anchor UE.
- the third identification information may be carried in a direct link establishment accept message, which is used to indicate that the sidelink between the target UE and the initializing anchor UE has been successfully established.
- step 404 is an optional step. If the additional anchor UE can receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information, in this case, step 404 may not be performed.
- the target UE sends the first identification information and/or the third identification information to the LMF.
- the LMF receives the first identification information and/or the third identification information from the target UE.
- the LMF sends the first identification information and/or the third identification information to the additional anchor UE.
- the additional anchor UE receives the first identification information and/or third identification information from the LMF.
- the target UE's ProSe direct discovery process and the process of establishing a communication connection between the target UE and the additional anchor UE are reduced. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to establish a communication connection with the additional anchor UE.
- the method further includes: the initialing anchor UE receives a side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information and/or the third identification information; the initialing anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result, such as the initialing anchor UE performs positioning measurement on the target UE according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain the second measurement result.
- the initialing anchor UE can perform positioning measurement on the target UE according to the side positioning reference signal.
- the second measurement result includes at least one of the following: one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the initialing anchor UE.
- the method also includes: initialing anchor UE obtains SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal, and the SCI is similar to the relevant description of step 302 in Figure 3, which is not repeated here.
- the initialing anchor UE When the initialing anchor UE obtains the first identification information, when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, the initialing anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
- the initialing anchor UE When the initialing anchor UE obtains the first identification information and the third identification information, when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, the initialing anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
- the initialing anchor UE When the initialing anchor UE obtains the third identification information, when the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, the initialing anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
- the present application also provides an embodiment shown in FIG5 , which may include the following steps:
- the target UE generates first information, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE, and the additional anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE. No communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE.
- step 502 and step 503 may be performed; or step 504 and step 505 may be performed.
- step 502 and step 503 are regarded as one implementation mode, such as mode A
- step 504 and step 505 are regarded as another implementation mode, such as mode B.
- the initialing anchor UE receives the first information from the target UE.
- the target UE sends the first information to the initialing anchor UE.
- the first information is used to request the determination of the additional anchor UE, which can be understood as the first information is used to request the initialing anchor UE to determine the additional anchor UE that participates in positioning the target UE.
- the first information may be carried in an SCI, a media access control (MAC) control element (CE) or a location information request (locationinformationrequest).
- MAC media access control
- CE control element
- location informationrequest location information request
- Initialing anchor UE determines additional anchor UE.
- step 503 may include: the initialing anchor UE determines an additional anchor UE, such as at least one additional anchor UE, from multiple first candidate anchor UEs according to prior information between the initialing anchor UE and multiple first candidate devices (recorded as first candidate anchor UEs). Optionally, this may be performed before step 403. In this way, the speed at which the initialing anchor UE determines the additional anchor UE can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
- the initialing anchor UE determines an additional anchor UE, such as at least one additional anchor UE, from multiple first candidate anchor UEs according to prior information between the initialing anchor UE and multiple first candidate devices (recorded as first candidate anchor UEs).
- this may be performed before step 403. In this way, the speed at which the initialing anchor UE determines the additional anchor UE can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
- the prior information between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs may be information sent by the target UE to the initialing anchor UE on the first sidelink, such as sent together with the first identification information in step 402, or sent separately; or, the prior information may be determined by the initialing anchor UE itself, which is not limited here.
- the prior information may include at least one of the following: the position of each first candidate anchor UE among the multiple first candidate anchor UEs, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs, the historical multicast or unicast context information corresponding to each first candidate anchor UE among the multiple first candidate anchor UEs, and the channel condition between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs.
- the position of the first candidate anchor UE involved in the present application may include at least one of the following: the longitude and latitude coordinates of the first candidate anchor UE or the longitude and latitude coordinate interval value of the longitude and latitude coordinates.
- the position of the first candidate anchor UE involved in the present application may include at least one of the following: the cell where the first candidate anchor UE is located or the tracking area where the first candidate anchor UE is located.
- the position of the first candidate anchor UE involved in the present application may be the relative position of the first candidate anchor UE, such as the direction and distance of the first candidate anchor UE relative to the initialing anchor UE, or the first candidate anchor UE. The direction and distance of the UE relative to a certain base station (the base station may or may not cover the initialing anchor UE).
- the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and any one of the multiple first candidate anchor UEs may include a previously established communication connection or no established communication connection.
- the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and any one of the multiple first candidate anchor UEs may include an established communication connection or no established communication connection.
- the initialing anchor UE When the initialing anchor UE takes a first candidate anchor UE as an additional anchor UE, and the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate anchor UE is that the communication connection is not established, the initialing anchor UE can establish a communication connection with the first candidate anchor UE.
- the historical unicast context information corresponding to each first candidate anchor UE among the multiple first candidate anchor UEs may include at least one of the following: an identifier of the first candidate anchor UE (such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID of the first candidate device), a historical service type identifier between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs, a V2X service quality characteristic identifier corresponding to the historical sidelink between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate devices, etc.
- an identifier of the first candidate anchor UE such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID of the first candidate device
- a historical service type identifier between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID of the first candidate device
- V2X service quality characteristic identifier corresponding to the historical sidelink between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate devices
- the historical multicast context information corresponding to each first candidate anchor UE among the multiple first candidate anchor UEs may include at least one of the following: a group identifier of the group to which the first candidate anchor UE belongs, a historical service type identifier between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs, and a V2X service quality characteristic identifier corresponding to the historical sidelink between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs.
- the historical service type identifier involved in this application can be used to identify the V2X service type on the PC5 link, such as positioning service information or road warning information, etc.
- the service quality characteristic identifier can be used to identify the service quality of the PC5 link, such as scheduling priority, etc.
- LMF receives the first information from the target UE.
- the target UE sends the first information to the LMF.
- the first information is used to request the determination of the additional anchor UE, which can be understood as the first information is used to request the LMF to determine the additional anchor UE participating in the positioning of the target UE.
- the first information may be carried in an additional anchor UE request (additional anchor UErequest) message.
- LMF determines the additional anchor UE.
- the method further includes: the LMF receives third identification information from the target UE; the LMF determines, based on the third identification information, prior information between the initialing anchor UE and a plurality of first candidate devices; step 505 includes: the LMF determines, based on the prior information, additional anchor UEs, such as at least one additional anchor UE, from the plurality of first candidate devices. This can speed up the speed at which the LMF determines the additional anchor UE, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
- the third identification information can refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here.
- LMF determines the prior information between the initialing anchor UE and multiple first candidate devices based on the third identification information, which may include: LMF obtains the correspondence between the third identification information and the prior information; LMF determines the prior information based on the third identification information and the correspondence.
- step 505 is similar to the prior information involved in step 503 and is not described in detail here.
- the initialing anchor UE or LMF can determine the additional anchor UEs participating in positioning the target UE, which indicates that the target UE does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, thereby reducing the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery and also reducing the positioning delay.
- step 301 when the additional anchor UE obtains the first identification information and/or the third identification information through the initialing anchor UE, step 403 in FIG. 4 is a specific implementation of step 301 in FIG. 3. At this time, step 401 and step 402 in FIG. 4 can be executed before step 301.
- step 406 in FIG. 4 when the additional anchor UE obtains the first identification information and/or the third identification information through the LMF, step 406 in FIG. 4 is a specific implementation of step 301 in FIG. 3. At this time, step 401, step 404 to step 405 in FIG. 4 can be executed before step 301.
- steps 501 to 503 may be performed before step 403, steps 501 to 503 may be performed.
- steps 501, 504, and 505 may be performed.
- the first identification information in step 402 and the first information in step 502 may be carried in the same message or in different messages.
- the identification information (such as the first identification information and/or the third identification information) sent in step 405 and the first information in step 504 may be carried in in the same message or in different messages.
- the above embodiments include many possible implementation schemes. Taking the additional anchor UE or initialing anchor UE receiving the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information as an example, some of the implementation schemes are illustrated in conjunction with Figures 6 to 8. It should be noted that the related concepts, operations or logical relationships not explained in Figures 6 to 8 can refer to the corresponding descriptions in the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 5, and therefore will not be repeated.
- Figure 6 is a flow chart of a positioning method under network coverage provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 6, the method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
- LMF sends a positioning request (position request) to the target UE, where the positioning request is used to request positioning measurement of the target UE.
- the target UE receives a positioning request from the LMF.
- the LMF may send the positioning request to the AMF, the AMF sends the positioning request to the gNB, and the gNB sends the positioning request to the target UE.
- LMF can also obtain the positioning capability of the target UE (such as the target UE's processing capability of the reference signal, etc.), etc.
- the specific process is not limited here.
- the target UE determines the initialing anchor UE.
- step 602 can refer to the relevant description of step 402 in Figure 4, and will not be repeated here.
- the target UE generates first information, and the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE.
- step 603 is similar to step 501 in Figure 5 and is not described again here.
- the target UE sends the first information to the initialing anchor UE.
- the initialing anchor UE receives the first information from the target UE, and the first information can be carried in the SCI or MAC CE.
- Initialing anchor UE determines additional anchor UE.
- step 605 is similar to step 503 in Figure 5 and is not described again here.
- the method further includes: the initialing anchor UE sends second information to the target UE, where the second information is used to notify the target UE that the determination of the additional anchor UE has been completed.
- the second information can be carried in the SCI or the MAC CE.
- the target UE generates first identification information.
- step 606 is similar to step 401 in Figure 4 and is not described again here.
- the target UE sends the first identification information to the initialing anchor UE.
- the initialing anchor UE receives the first identification information from the target UE.
- Additional anchor UE receives the first identification information from initialing anchor UE.
- the initialing anchor UE sends the first identification information to the additional anchor UE.
- LMF obtains the third identification information and the identification of the additional anchor UE.
- the third identification information can refer to the relevant description of step 301 in FIG. 3, which is not repeated here.
- the LMF receives first identification information, third identification information and identification of additional anchor UEs from an initialing anchor UE.
- the identification of the additional anchor UE can be obtained from the additional anchor UE.
- the LMF receives first identification information and an identification of an additional anchor UE from an initialing anchor UE.
- the method further includes: the LMF receives third identification information from the target UE; and the LMF sends a first request message to the initialing anchor UE based on the third identification information, and the first request message is used to request the identification of the additional anchor UE.
- the first identification information and the identification of the additional anchor UE may be carried in a response message to the first request message.
- the method further includes: the LMF sends a second request message to the target UE, and the second request message is used to request the third identification information.
- the third identification information may be carried in a response message to the second request message, for example.
- the LMF receives third identification information and an identification of an additional anchor UE from the target UE.
- the method further includes: the LMF sends a third request message to the target UE, and the third request message is used to request the third identification information and the identification of the additional anchor UE.
- the third identification information and the identification of the additional anchor UE may be carried in a response message of the third request message, for example. It should be noted that, for the target UE, the identification of the additional anchor UE may be obtained from the initialing anchor UE.
- the first request message, the second request message, and the third request message involved in step 609 may be referred to as anchor UE request messages.
- the response message of the first request message, the response message of the second request message, and the response message of the third request message may be referred to as anchor UE response messages.
- LMF sends a second measurement request and a first measurement request to the initialing anchor UE and the additional anchor UE respectively according to the third identification information and the identification of the additional anchor UE.
- the initialing anchor UE receives the second measurement request from the LMF
- the additional anchor UE receives the first measurement request from the LMF.
- the second measurement request is used to indicate the second positioning type, such as one or more of the RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the initialing anchor UE.
- the first measurement request is used to indicate the first positioning type, such as one or more of the RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the additional anchor UE.
- LMF can send the second measurement request and the first measurement request at the same time, or send the second measurement request first and then send the first measurement request, or send the first measurement request first and then send the second measurement request, which is not limited here.
- the target UE sends a resource request message to the gNB, where the resource request message is used to request the first resource configuration of the sidelink positioning reference signal.
- the gNB receives a resource request message from the target UE.
- the resource request message may be referred to as a SL-PRS resource request (SL-PRS resource request) message.
- step 302 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here.
- the first resource configuration includes at least one of the following: configuration of time domain resources (including the period of periodic resources and the time slot level offset within the period, the symbol index within the time slot, etc.), configuration of frequency domain resources (including bandwidth, starting resource block (RB), frequency hopping configuration, frequency domain comb configuration) or the pattern of the side positioning reference signal, etc., which are not limited here.
- the pattern of the side positioning reference signal may refer to one or more resource elements (RE) within an RB of the side positioning reference signal in a time slot, the time domain length and frequency domain length of the side positioning reference signal resource, etc.
- the gNB sends a response message to the resource request message to the target UE, where the response message to the resource request message includes the resource configuration.
- the target UE receives a response message to the resource request message from the gNB.
- the response message to the resource request message may be referred to as an SL-PRS resource response (SL-PRS resourceresponse) message.
- the method also includes: the target UE broadcasts the first resource configuration.
- Steps 611 to 612 can be executed before or after any one of steps 602 to 610, or can be executed simultaneously with any one of steps 602 to 610.
- the target UE sends a side positioning reference signal according to the first resource configuration.
- the additional anchor UE and the initialing anchor UE receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information.
- the additional anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result.
- step 614 is similar to step 303 in Figure 3 and is not described again here.
- the initialing anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result.
- the second measurement result can refer to the relevant description of Figure 4, which is not repeated here. It should be understood that the second measurement result is associated with the second positioning type. For example, if the second positioning type is RTOA from the target UE to the initialing anchor UE, the second measurement result is RTOA.
- the second positioning type includes AOA, RSRP, RSRPP and path arrival time
- the second measurement result includes AOA, RSRP, RSRPP and path arrival time.
- Step 614 can be executed before or after step 615, or simultaneously with step 615.
- the LMF receives a first measurement result from the additional anchor UE.
- the additional anchor UE sends the first measurement result to the LMF.
- the first measurement result may be carried in a response message of the first measurement request, for example.
- the response message of the first measurement request may be referred to as a measurement response (measurement response) message or a measurement report (measurement report).
- LMF receives the second measurement result from the initialing anchor UE.
- the initialing anchor UE sends the second measurement result to the LMF.
- the second measurement result may be carried in a response message of the second measurement request, for example.
- the response message of the second measurement request may be called a measurementresponse message or a measurementreport.
- Step 616 can be executed before or after step 617, or simultaneously with step 617.
- LMF determines the location information of the target UE based on the first measurement result and the second measurement result.
- the location information of the target UE may be geographic location coordinates in a certain location system (e.g., the global positioning system (GPS) or the Beidou satellite system).
- a certain location system e.g., the global positioning system (GPS) or the Beidou satellite system.
- the initialing anchor UE determines the additional anchor UE, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the target UE and the process of establishing a communication connection between the target UE and the additional anchor UE. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to establish a communication connection with the additional anchor UE, and also reduce the positioning delay.
- Figure 7 is a flow chart of a positioning method without network coverage provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 7, the method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
- steps 702 to 708 in FIG. 7 are similar to steps 602 to 608 in FIG. 6 , respectively, except that:
- the target UE is pre-configured with the second resource configuration of the side positioning reference signal.
- the second resource configuration may include a pattern of a sideline positioning reference signal.
- a pattern of a sideline positioning reference signal reference may be made to the related description of step 611 in FIG6 , which will not be described in detail here.
- UEs around the target UE may also be pre-configured with a second resource configuration.
- the UEs around the target UE may be understood as one or more UEs that may participate in locating the target UE.
- the initialing anchor UE sends a first measurement request to the additional anchor UE.
- the additional anchor UE receives the first measurement request from the initialing anchor UE.
- the first measurement request is used to indicate the first positioning type, such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, side positioning reference signal Doppler component, side positioning reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the additional anchor UE.
- the first positioning type such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, side positioning reference signal Doppler component, side positioning reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc.
- the first identification information in step 708 and the first measurement request in step 709 may be carried in the same message or in different messages, which is not limited here.
- the target UE sends a side positioning reference signal according to the second resource configuration.
- the additional anchor UE and the initialing anchor UE receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information.
- the target UE may also send an SCI according to the second resource configuration, and the SCI includes second identification information.
- the second identification information please refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here. If the initialing anchor UE detects that the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, the initialing anchor UE comes from the side positioning reference signal of the target UE. Similarly, when the additional anchor UE detects that the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, the additional anchor UE comes from the side positioning reference signal of the target UE.
- the method may further include: the target UE determines the sidelink resource according to the sidelink resource perception result; step 710 may include: the target UE sends a sidelink positioning reference signal on the first sidelink according to the second resource configuration and the sidelink resource.
- the target UE may obtain the resources reserved by other UEs by sensing a certain SCI, and determine a resource set based on the resources reserved by other UEs, such as the target UE measures the RSRP of the channel signal for the resources reserved by other UEs, and excludes resources with higher RSRP energy from the resources reserved by other UEs to obtain a resource set.
- the target UE may consider that the channel is not occupied and the corresponding resource is available. In this way, the target UE can determine one or more available resources. Further, the target UE can select a sidelink resource from the resource set, such as the target UE selects any one resource from the resource set as the sidelink resource.
- the additional anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the sidetrack positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result.
- step 711 is similar to step 614 in Figure 6 and is not described again here.
- the initialing anchor UE receives the first measurement result from the additional anchor UE.
- the additional anchor UE sends the first measurement result to the initialing anchor UE.
- the initialing anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result.
- step 713 is similar to step 615 in Figure 6 and is not described again here.
- step 713 can be executed before or after any one of step 711 and step 712, or can be executed simultaneously with any one of step 711 and step 712.
- the initialing anchor UE determines the location information of the target UE based on the first measurement result and the second measurement result.
- the location information of the target UE may be the geographic location coordinates in a certain location system (e.g., GPS or Beidou satellite system).
- a certain location system e.g., GPS or Beidou satellite system.
- the target UE receives the location information of the target UE from the initialing anchor UE.
- the initialing anchor UE sends the location information of the target UE to the target UE.
- the location information of the target UE can be carried in the positioning information response (locationinformationresponse) message.
- the first information involved in step 704 can be carried in locationinformationrequest.
- the locationinformationrequest can be used to indicate the second positioning type, such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, side positioning reference signal Doppler component, side positioning reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the initialing anchor UE.
- the initialing anchor UE determines the additional anchor UE, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the target UE and the process of establishing a communication connection between the target UE and the additional anchor UE. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to establish a communication connection with the additional anchor UE, and can also reduce the positioning delay.
- FIG8 is a flow chart of another positioning method under network coverage provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG8 , the method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
- steps 801 to 802 in FIG. 8 are similar to steps 602 to 603 in FIG. 6
- steps 804 to 805 in FIG. 8 are similar to steps 504 to 505 in FIG. 5
- steps 811 to 819 in FIG. 8 are similar to steps 610 to 618 in FIG. 6 , respectively, except that:
- the target UE sends a positioning request to the LMF, where the positioning request is used to request positioning measurement for the target UE.
- the target UE may send the positioning request to the gNB, the gNB sends the positioning request to the AMF, and the AMF sends the positioning request to the LMF.
- step 802 there is no necessary order of execution between step 802 and step 803 , such as step 802 can be executed before or after step 803 , or simultaneously with step 803 .
- the target UE generates first identification information.
- the first identification information can refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here.
- the target UE sends the first identification information to the initialing anchor UE and LMF respectively.
- the initialing anchor UE and LMF receive the first identification information from the target UE.
- LMF sends the first identification information to the additional anchor UE.
- the additional anchor UE receives the first identification information from the LMF.
- the target UE receives the third information from the LMF, and the third information is used to notify the LMF that the determination of the additional anchor UE has been completed.
- the LMF sends the third information to the target UE.
- the third information can be carried in an additional anchor UE response message.
- step 809 may be an optional step.
- LMF receives the third identification information from the target UE.
- the target UE sends the third identification information to the LMF.
- the third identification information can be obtained from the initialing anchor UE.
- the third identification information can refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which is not repeated here.
- the first information in step 804 may be carried in the same message or in different messages with at least one of the following: the first identification information in step 807, the third identification information in step 810, etc., which are not limited here.
- the first identification information in 807 and the third identification information in step 810 may be carried in the same message or in different messages, which are not limited here.
- the target UE receives the location information of the target UE from the LMF.
- LMF sends the location information of target UE to target UE.
- the additional anchor UE is determined by the LMF, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the target UE and the process of establishing a communication connection between the target UE and the additional anchor UE. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to establish a communication connection with the additional anchor UE, and also reduce the positioning delay.
- FIG. 6 or FIG. 8 may be applicable to mode 1 in a V2X communication scenario
- the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 may be applicable to mode 2 in a V2X communication scenario.
- the above-mentioned implementation devices include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of various functions. It should be easily appreciated by those skilled in the art that, in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
- the embodiment of the present application can divide the target UE, initialing anchor UE, additional anchor UE or LMF into functional modules according to the above method example.
- each functional module can be divided according to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
- the above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical functional division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device 900 can be applied to the method shown in any one of the embodiments of FIG. 3 to FIG. 8 above.
- the communication device 900 includes: a processing module 901 and a transceiver module 902.
- the processing module 901 can be one or more processors, and the transceiver module 902 can be a transceiver or a communication interface.
- the communication device can be used to implement the target UE, initialing anchor UE, additional anchor UE or LMF involved in any of the above method embodiments, or to implement the functions of the network element involved in any of the above method embodiments.
- the network element or network function can be a network element in a hardware device, a software function running on dedicated hardware, or a virtualized function instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud platform).
- the communication device 900 can also include a storage module 903 for storing program code and data of the communication device 900.
- the communication device when the communication device serves as an additional anchor UE or a chip used in an additional anchor UE, and executes the steps performed by the additional anchor UE in the above method embodiment.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to support communication with the initialing anchor UE, gNB, LMF, etc.
- the transceiver module specifically performs the sending and/or receiving actions performed by the additional anchor UE in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8, such as supporting the additional anchor UE to perform other processes of the technology described in this document.
- the processing module 901 can be used to support the communication device 900 to perform the processing actions in the above method embodiment, for example, supporting the additional anchor UE to perform step 303, and/or other processes of the technology described in this document.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to obtain first identification information, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE; the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information; the processing module 901 is used to perform positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive third identification information from the initialing anchor UE or LMF, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located; the SCI also includes fourth identification information.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a first measurement request from an initialing anchor UE or LMF, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to send the first measurement result to the initialing anchor UE or LMF.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to send the identifier of the additional anchor UE to the initialing anchor UE.
- the communication device when used as an initialing anchor UE or a chip used in an initialing anchor UE, and executes the steps performed by the initialing anchor UE in the above method embodiment.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to support communication with the target UE, additional anchor UE, gNB, LMF, etc.
- the transceiver module specifically executes the steps performed by the initialing anchor UE in any of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8.
- the processing module 901 may be used to support the communication device 900 to perform the processing actions in the above method embodiment, for example, supporting the initialing anchor UE to perform step 503, and/or other processes of the technology described in this document.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to: receive first identification information from a target UE, where the first identification information is used for an additional anchor UE to perform positioning measurement, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE; and send the first identification information to the additional anchor UE.
- the processing module 901 is further used to determine at least one additional anchor UE from multiple first candidate devices based on prior information between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate devices; wherein the prior information includes at least one of the following: the position of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device, historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive first information from the target UE, where the first information is used to request determination of an additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive an additional anchor UE identifier from an additional anchor UE; and send first identification information, the additional anchor UE identifier and third identification information to the LMF, wherein the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE from the additional anchor UE; and send the first identifier information and the identifier of the additional anchor UE to the LMF.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a first request message from the LMF, where the first request message is used to request an identifier of an additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE from the additional anchor UE; and send the identifier of the additional anchor UE to the target UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to send third identification information to the additional anchor UE or the target UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group where the initialing anchor UE is located, or the broadcast address.
- the processing module 901 is further used to: receive a sidetrack positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information; and perform positioning measurement according to the sidetrack positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to obtain the SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal; when receiving the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information, the transceiver module 902 is used to receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE when the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information.
- the transceiver module 902 is further configured to receive a second measurement request from the LMF, where the second measurement request is used to indicate a second positioning type.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to receive a first measurement result from an additional anchor UE; the processing module 901 is further used to determine the location information of the target UE based on the second measurement result and the first measurement result; the transceiver module 902 is further used to send the location information of the target UE to the target UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to send a first measurement request to the additional anchor UE, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to receive first information from the target UE, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE, and the additional anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE; the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UE.
- the processing module 901 when determining an additional anchor UE, is used to determine the additional anchor UE from multiple first candidate devices based on prior information between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate devices; wherein the prior information includes at least one of the following: the position of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device, the historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive first identification information from the target UE, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE; and send the first identification information to an additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive an additional anchor UE identifier from an additional anchor UE; send first identification information, the additional anchor UE identifier and third identification information to the LMF, wherein the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE from the additional anchor UE; and send the first identifier information and the identifier of the additional anchor UE to the LMF.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a first request message from the LMF, where the first request message is used to request an identifier of an additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE from the additional anchor UE; and send the identifier of the additional anchor UE to the target UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to send third identification information to the additional anchor UE or the target UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group where the initialing anchor UE is located, or the broadcast address.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to receive a side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information; the processing module 901 is further used to perform positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to obtain the SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal; when receiving the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information, the transceiver module 902 is used to receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE when the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information.
- the transceiver module 902 is further configured to receive a second measurement request from the LMF, where the second measurement request is used to indicate a second positioning type.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to receive a first measurement result from an additional anchor UE; the processing module 901 is further used to determine the location information of the target UE based on the second measurement result and the first measurement result; the transceiver module 902 is further used to send the location information of the target UE to the target UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to send a first measurement request to the additional anchor UE, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type.
- the communication device acts as a target UE or a chip used in a target UE, and executes the steps performed by the target UE in the above method embodiment.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to support communication with the initialing anchor UE, gNB, LMF, etc.
- the transceiver module specifically performs the sending and/or receiving actions performed by the target UE in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8, such as supporting the target UE to perform other processes of the technology described in this document.
- the processing module 901 can be used to support the communication device 900 to perform the processing actions in the above method embodiment, for example, supporting the target UE to execute step 501, and/or other processes of the technology described in this document.
- the processing module 901 is used to generate first identification information, where the first identification information is used for additional anchor UE to perform positioning measurement, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE; the transceiver module 902 is used to send the first identification information to the initialing anchor UE or LMF.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to send first information to the initialing anchor UE or LMF, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive third identification information from the initialing anchor UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or the broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located; and send the third identification information to the LMF.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive a second request message from the LMF, where the second request message is used to request third identification information.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE and the third identifier information from the initialing anchor UE, where the third identifier information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or the broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located; and send the identifier of the additional anchor UE and the third identifier information to the LMF.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a third request message from the LMF, where the third request message is used to request the identifier of the additional anchor UE and third identifier information.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to send a side positioning reference signal, which is used for additional anchor UE and initialing anchor UE to perform positioning measurements.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive the location information of the target UE from the initialing anchor UE.
- the processing module 901 is used to generate first information, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE, where the additional anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE; the transceiver module 902 is used to send the first information to the initialing anchor UE or the LMF.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to send first identification information to the initialing anchor UE or LMF, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive third identification information from the initialing anchor UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or the broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located; and send the third identification information to the LMF.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive a second request message from the LMF, where the second request message is used to request third identification information.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE and the third identifier information from the initialing anchor UE, where the third identifier information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or the broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located; and send the identifier of the additional anchor UE and the third identifier information to the LMF.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a third request message from the LMF, where the third request message is used to request the identifier of the additional anchor UE and third identifier information.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to send a side positioning reference signal, which is used for additional anchor UE and initialing anchor UE to perform positioning measurements.
- the communication device when the communication device acts as an LMF or a chip used in an LMF, and executes the steps performed by the LMF in the above method embodiment.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to support communication with the initialing anchor UE, target UE, additional anchor UE, gNB, LMF, etc.
- the transceiver module specifically performs the sending and/or receiving actions performed by the LMF in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8, such as supporting the LMF to perform other processes of the technology described in this document.
- the processing module 901 can be used to support the communication device 900 to perform the processing actions in the above method embodiment, for example, supporting the target UE to perform step 505, and/or other processes of the technology described in this document.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to: receive first identification information from a target UE, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE, where no communication link is established between the target UE and an additional anchor UE, and where the additional anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurements on the target UE; and send the first identification information to the additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to receive first information from the target UE, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE; the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to receive third identification information from the target UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located, and the initialing anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE; the processing module 901 is further used to determine the prior information between the initialing anchor UE and multiple first candidate devices based on the third identification information; when determining additional anchor UEs, the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UEs from the multiple first candidate devices based on the prior information.
- the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device, historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device.
- the transceiver module 902 is also used to send third identification information to an additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is used to receive first information from the target UE, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE, and the additional anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE; the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to receive third identification information from the target UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located, and the initialing anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE; the processing module 901 is further used to determine the prior information between the initialing anchor UE and multiple first candidate devices based on the third identification information; when determining additional anchor UEs, the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UEs from the multiple first candidate devices based on the prior information.
- the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device, historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device.
- the transceiver module 902 is further configured to send third identification information to the additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive first identification information from the target UE, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE; and send the first identification information to the additional anchor UE.
- the transceiver module 902 may be a communication interface, a pin or a circuit, etc.
- the communication interface may be used to input data to be processed to the processor, and may output the processing result of the processor to the outside.
- the communication interface may be a general purpose input output (GPIO) interface, which may be connected to multiple peripheral devices (such as a display (LCD), a camera (camara), a radio frequency (RF) module, an antenna, etc.).
- GPIO general purpose input output
- peripheral devices such as a display (LCD), a camera (camara), a radio frequency (RF) module, an antenna, etc.
- the communication interface is connected to the processor via a bus.
- the processing module 901 may be a processor, which may execute computer-executable instructions stored in the storage module, so that the chip executes a method involved in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 8 .
- the processor may include a controller, an arithmetic unit and a register.
- the controller is mainly responsible for decoding instructions and issuing control signals for operations corresponding to the instructions.
- the arithmetic unit is mainly responsible for performing fixed-point or floating-point arithmetic operations, shift operations, and logical operations, etc., and may also perform address operations and conversions.
- the register is mainly responsible for storing register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of instructions.
- the hardware architecture of the processor may be an ASIC architecture, a microprocessor without interlocked piped stages architecture (MIPS) architecture, an advanced RISC machines (ARM) architecture, or a second processor (NP) architecture, etc.
- the processor may be single-core or multi-core.
- the storage module may be a storage module within the chip, such as a register, a cache, etc.
- the storage module may also be a storage module located outside the chip, such as a ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, a RAM, etc.
- processors and the interface can be implemented through hardware design, software design, or a combination of hardware and software, and there is no limitation here.
- FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a simplified UE structure provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- UE takes a mobile phone as an example.
- the UE includes at least one processor, and may also include a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input/output device.
- the processor may be used to process communication protocols and communication data, and may also be used to control the UE, execute software programs, process data of software programs, etc.
- the UE may also include a memory, which is mainly used to store software programs and data. These programs involved may be loaded into the memory when the communication device leaves the factory, or may be loaded into the memory when needed later.
- the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for conversion between baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing of radio frequency signals.
- the antenna is mainly used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves, and the antenna is the antenna provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- Input/output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of UE may not have input/output devices.
- the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the RF circuit.
- the RF circuit performs RF processing on the baseband signal and then sends the RF signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
- the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor.
- the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
- only one memory and processor are shown in Figure 10. In an actual UE product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
- the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc.
- the memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
- the antenna and the radio frequency circuit with transceiver functions can be regarded as the receiving unit and the sending unit of the UE (also collectively referred to as the transceiver unit), and the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit of the UE.
- the UE includes a receiving module 31, a processing module 32 and a sending module 33.
- the receiving module 31 can also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc.
- the sending module 33 can also be called a transmitter, a transmitter, a transmitter, a transmitting circuit, etc.
- the processing module 32 can also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing device, etc.
- the processing module 32 is used to execute the functions of the target UE, initialing anchor UE or additional anchor UE in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8.
- An embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes at least one processor and a memory; wherein the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions; and at least one processor is used to execute the computer programs or instructions in the memory, so that any method described in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8 is executed.
- An embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores computer instructions. When the computer instructions are executed, the computer executes any method in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8.
- An embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes: a computer program code, and when the computer program code is executed by a computer, the computer executes any one of the methods in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 8 .
- An embodiment of the present application provides a chip, which is coupled to a memory and is used to read and execute program instructions in the memory, so that a device where the chip is located implements the method described in any possible implementation of any embodiment shown in Figures 3 to 8.
- each network element unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into a processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software network element units.
- the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software network element unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the part that essentially contributes to the technical solution of the present application, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a terminal device, a cloud server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the above-mentioned methods of each embodiment of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
- Position Fixing By Use Of Radio Waves (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求在2023年3月30日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202310357984.8的中国专利申请的优先权,发明名称为“定位方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application with application number 202310357984.8 filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on March 30, 2023, and priority to the Chinese patent application with invention name “Positioning Method and Device”, all contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种定位方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a positioning method and device.
随着通讯技术快速发展,高精度定位也逐步被确定为第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)第五代移动通信系统(5th generation mobile networks or 5th generation wireless systems,5G)中重要研究项目。其中,蜂窝车联网(cellular vehicle-to-everything)应用中的侧行链路(sidelink,SL)是当前定位研究的焦点之一,与提高定位完整性、精度等增强功能互补。With the rapid development of communication technology, high-precision positioning has gradually been identified as an important research project in the 5th generation mobile networks (or 5th generation wireless systems, 5G) of the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). Among them, the sidelink (SL) in the cellular vehicle-to-everything application is one of the focuses of current positioning research, which complements the enhancement functions such as improving positioning integrity and accuracy.
在侧行链路定位场景中,待定位的终端设备需要先与多个路边单元(road-side unit,RSU)分别完成邻近服务直接发现(ProSe direct discovery)、终端直连通信接口(direct communication interface,PC5)链路建立等过程,再通过PC5单播或组播通信完成定位相关信令的传递、测量等过程。也就是说,待定位的终端设备必须进行ProSe发现,并与不同RSU建立PC5链路,这使得侧行链路定位的信令开销和定位时延较大,尤其是在高精度定位中,往往需要与不止三个RSU建立PC5链接来提供信息冗余,这进一步加剧了侧行链路定位的信令开销与定位时延。因此,如何降低信令开销和定位时延成为当前阶段亟待解决的技术问题。In the sidelink positioning scenario, the terminal device to be positioned needs to first complete the ProSe direct discovery (ProSe direct discovery) and terminal direct communication interface (PC5) link establishment processes with multiple roadside units (RSUs), and then complete the transmission and measurement of positioning-related signaling through PC5 unicast or multicast communication. In other words, the terminal device to be positioned must perform ProSe discovery and establish PC5 links with different RSUs, which makes the signaling overhead and positioning delay of sidelink positioning large. Especially in high-precision positioning, it is often necessary to establish PC5 links with more than three RSUs to provide information redundancy, which further aggravates the signaling overhead and positioning delay of sidelink positioning. Therefore, how to reduce signaling overhead and positioning delay has become a technical problem that needs to be solved urgently at the current stage.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种定位方法及装置,可以降低终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接所需的信令开销,还可以减少定位时延。The present application provides a positioning method and apparatus, which can reduce the signaling overhead required for a terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, can also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with a first device, and can also reduce positioning delay.
第一方面,提供一种定位方法,该方法应用于第一设备,该方法包括:获取第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识终端设备,终端设备与第一设备之间未建立通信链路;根据第一标识信息,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号;根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第一测量结果。In a first aspect, a positioning method is provided, which is applied to a first device, and the method includes: obtaining first identification information, the first identification information is used to identify a terminal device, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device; based on the first identification information, receiving a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device; and performing positioning measurement based on the side positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result.
在上述实施方式中,第一设备可以在未与终端设备建立通信连接的情况下,根据第一标识信息来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,这减少了终端设备的ProSe直接发现过程以及终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接所需的信令开销。同时,第一设备还根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第一测量结果,这意味着上述实施方式是定位场景,因此,还可以减少定位时延。In the above implementation, the first device can obtain a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device based on the first identification information without establishing a communication connection with the terminal device, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device. At the same time, the first device also performs positioning measurements based on the side positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result, which means that the above implementation is a positioning scenario, and therefore, the positioning delay can also be reduced.
可选的,第一设备可以用于对终端设备进行定位测量。Optionally, the first device can be used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device.
其中,第一标识信息可以是终端设备的标识,如层1标识(layer 1identification,L1 ID)、层2标识(layer 2 identification,L2 ID)或层3标识(layer 3 identification,L3 ID)。也可以称为源标识,如源L1 ID、源L2 ID或源L3 ID等。The first identification information may be an identification of a terminal device, such as layer 1 identification (L1 ID), layer 2 identification (L2 ID) or layer 3 identification (L3 ID). It may also be called a source identification, such as source L1 ID, source L2 ID or source L3 ID.
需要指出的是,本申请涉及的通信链路可以指侧行链路、PC5链路或PC5连接。如,终端设备与第一设备之间未建立通信链路,可以理解为终端设备与第一设备之间未建立侧行链路、PC5链路或PC5连接等。It should be noted that the communication link involved in this application may refer to a side link, a PC5 link or a PC5 connection. For example, if a communication link is not established between the terminal device and the first device, it can be understood that a side link, a PC5 link or a PC5 connection is not established between the terminal device and the first device.
其中,本申请涉及的侧行定位参考信号用于定位等,如定位参考信号(positioning reference signal,PRS)、解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)或侧行链路同步信号(sidelink synchronization signal,SLSS)。PRS也可以称为侧行链路定位参考信号(sidelink positioning reference signal,SL-PRS)。Among them, the sidelink positioning reference signal involved in this application is used for positioning, such as positioning reference signal (PRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS) or sidelink synchronization signal (SLSS). PRS can also be called sidelink positioning reference signal (SL-PRS).
其中,第一测量结果例如可以包括以下至少一项:终端设备到第一设备的相对到达时间(relative time of arrival,RTOA)、到达时间(time of arrival,TOA)、到达角(angle of arrival,AOA)、参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power,RSRP)、参考信号接收径功率(reference signal received path power,RSRPP)、径到达时间(relative of path arrival)、径到达角(angle of path arrival)、参考信号多普勒分量(reference signal doppler component)、参考信号径多普勒分量(reference signal path doppler component)、终端设备速度(UE velocity)等中的一项或多项。Among them, the first measurement result may, for example, include at least one of the following: relative time of arrival (RTOA) from the terminal device to the first device, time of arrival (TOA), angle of arrival (AOA), reference signal received power (RSRP), reference signal received path power (RSRPP), path arrival time (relative of path arrival), angle of arrival (angle of path arrival), reference signal Doppler component (reference signal doppler component), reference signal path Doppler component (reference signal path doppler component), terminal device speed (UE velocity), etc. One or more of the following.
需要指出的是,本申请涉及的RTOA指接收端接收到参考信号所在子帧的起始点相对于RTOA参考时间的时间。ToA指接收端接收到参考信号所在子帧的起始点时间;AOA指相对于参考方向,参考信号的 方位角和垂直角。RSRP指在参考信号配置的测量时间与测量带宽内,承载参考信号的资源单元上的接收信号功率的均值。RSRPP指在参考信号配置的测量时间与测量带宽内,承载参考信号的资源单元在传输信道的某条时延路径上的接收功率均值,其中,第一时延路径的RSRPP为第一检测到(即最先检测到)的传输路径上对应的接收功率均值。径到达时间指接收端接收到参考信号在传输信道的某条路径上对应的接收分量的时间。该时间可以是相对于参考信号所在子帧起始点的时间、相对ToA的时间或相对某条径到达时间的时间。径到达角指相对于参考方向,参考信号在某条传输径上的方位角和垂直角。参考信号多普勒分量指在给定参考信号到达时间与到达角度的情况下,接收端两次连续测量得到的参考信号的到达相位差。参考信号径多普勒分量指在给定参考信号传输径的到达时间与到达角度情况下,接收端两次连续测量得到的参考信号在该传输径上的到达相位差。终端设备速度指接收端基于参考信号所测得的目标设备(如本申请的终端设备)的速度,包括方向和大小信息。It should be noted that the RTOA involved in this application refers to the time when the receiving end receives the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located relative to the RTOA reference time. ToA refers to the time when the receiving end receives the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located; AOA refers to the time when the reference signal is located relative to the reference direction. Azimuth and vertical angle. RSRP refers to the mean of the received signal power on the resource unit carrying the reference signal within the measurement time and measurement bandwidth configured for the reference signal. RSRPP refers to the mean of the received power of the resource unit carrying the reference signal on a certain delay path of the transmission channel within the measurement time and measurement bandwidth configured for the reference signal, wherein the RSRPP of the first delay path is the corresponding mean of the received power on the first detected (i.e., first detected) transmission path. Path arrival time refers to the time when the receiving end receives the corresponding received component of the reference signal on a certain path of the transmission channel. The time can be the time relative to the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located, the time relative to ToA, or the time relative to the arrival time of a certain path. Path arrival angle refers to the azimuth and vertical angle of the reference signal on a certain transmission path relative to the reference direction. The reference signal Doppler component refers to the arrival phase difference of the reference signal obtained by two consecutive measurements by the receiving end when the reference signal arrival time and arrival angle are given. The reference signal path Doppler component refers to the arrival phase difference of the reference signal on the transmission path obtained by two consecutive measurements by the receiving end under the condition of the arrival time and arrival angle of the reference signal transmission path. The terminal device speed refers to the speed of the target device (such as the terminal device of this application) measured by the receiving end based on the reference signal, including direction and size information.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,获取第一标识信息,包括:接收来自第二设备或定位服务器的第一标识信息。可选的,第二设备可以用于对终端设备进行定位测量。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, obtaining the first identification information includes: receiving the first identification information from a second device or a positioning server. Optionally, the second device may be used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:获取侧行定位参考信号对应的侧行链路控制信息(sidelink control inforamtion,SCI);根据第一标识信息,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,包括:当SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the method also includes: obtaining sidelink control information (SCI) corresponding to the sidelink positioning reference signal; receiving the sidelink positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information, including: when the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, receiving the sidelink positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
在上述实施方式中,在侧行定位参考信号对应的SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,第一设备可以接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,避免了第一设备错误接收侧行定位参考信号的情况。In the above implementation, when the second identification information included in the SCI corresponding to the sideline positioning reference signal is the same as the first identification information, the first device can receive the sideline positioning reference signal from the terminal device, thereby avoiding the situation where the first device erroneously receives the sideline positioning reference signal.
其中,第二标识信息可以是终端设备的标识,如L1 ID、L2 ID或L3 ID等。Among them, the second identification information can be the identification of the terminal device, such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第二设备或定位服务器的第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址;SCI还包括第四标识信息,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,包括:当第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同,且第四标识信息与第三标识信息相同时,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the method also includes: receiving third identification information from a second device or a positioning server, the third identification information being used to identify the second device, a device group or a broadcast address where the second device is located; the SCI also includes fourth identification information, receiving a side positioning reference signal from a terminal device, including: when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, receiving a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
在上述实施方式中,在侧行定位参考信号对应的SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同,且该SCI包括的第四标识信息与第三标识信息相同时,第一设备可以接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,避免了第一设备错误接收侧行定位参考信号的情况。In the above embodiment, when the second identification information included in the SCI corresponding to the sideline positioning reference signal is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information included in the SCI is the same as the third identification information, the first device can receive the sideline positioning reference signal from the terminal device, thereby avoiding the situation where the first device erroneously receives the sideline positioning reference signal.
其中,当第三标识信息用于标识第二设备时,第三标识信息可以是第二设备的标识,如L1 ID、L2 ID或L3 ID等。也可以称为目的标识,如目的L1 ID、目的L2 ID或目的L3 ID等。第四标识信息可以是第二设备的标识。When the third identification information is used to identify the second device, the third identification information may be an identification of the second device, such as L1 ID, L2 ID, or L3 ID, etc. It may also be called a destination identification, such as a destination L1 ID, a destination L2 ID, or a destination L3 ID, etc. The fourth identification information may be an identification of the second device.
当第三标识信息用于标识第二设备所在的设备组时,第三标识信息可以是第二设备所在组的组标识。第四标识信息可以是第二设备所在组的组标识。When the third identification information is used to identify the device group to which the second device belongs, the third identification information may be the group identification of the group to which the second device belongs. The fourth identification information may be the group identification of the group to which the second device belongs.
当第三标识信息用于标识广播地址时,第三标识信息可以是广播地址信息。第四标识信息可以是广播地址信息。When the third identification information is used to identify a broadcast address, the third identification information may be broadcast address information. The fourth identification information may be broadcast address information.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,根据第一标识信息,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号之前,该方法还包括:接收来自第二设备或定位服务器的第一测量请求,第一测量请求用于指示第一定位类型,如终端设备到第一设备的RTOA、TOA、AOA、RSRP、RSRPP、径到达时间、径到达角、参考信号多普勒分量、参考信号径多普勒分量、终端设备速度等中的一项或多项。这使得第一设备可以获知相应的定位类型有哪些。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, before receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information, the method further includes: receiving a first measurement request from the second device or the positioning server, the first measurement request being used to indicate a first positioning type, such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, terminal device speed, etc. from the terminal device to the first device. This enables the first device to know what the corresponding positioning types are.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:向第二设备或定位服务器发送第一测量结果。这使得第二设备或定位服务器可以获取到第一测量结果,进而可以根据第一测量结果,确定终端设备的位置信息。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending the first measurement result to the second device or the positioning server, so that the second device or the positioning server can obtain the first measurement result, and then determine the location information of the terminal device according to the first measurement result.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:向第二设备发送第一设备的标识。In combination with the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending an identifier of the first device to the second device.
其中,第一设备的标识可以是L1 ID、L2 ID或L3 ID等。Among them, the identifier of the first device can be L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID, etc.
第二方面,提供一种定位方法,该方法应用于第二设备,该方法包括:接收来自终端设备的第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于第一设备进行定位测量,终端设备与第一设备之间未建立通信链路;向第一设备发送第一标识信息。In a second aspect, a positioning method is provided, which is applied to a second device, and the method includes: receiving first identification information from a terminal device, the first identification information is used for the first device to perform positioning measurement, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device; and sending the first identification information to the first device.
在上述实施方式中,第二设备可以从终端设备获取第一标识信息,进而可以向第一设备发送第一标识信息,以使得在第一设备未与终端设备建立通信连接的情况下,第一设备可以根据第一标识信息来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号并进行定位测量,这减少了终端设备的ProSe直接发现过程以及终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以 降低终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接所需的信令开销。In the above implementation, the second device can obtain the first identification information from the terminal device, and then send the first identification information to the first device, so that when the first device has not established a communication connection with the terminal device, the first device can obtain the side positioning reference signal of the terminal device according to the first identification information and perform positioning measurement, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also The signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device is reduced.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:根据第二设备与多个第一候选设备之间的先验信息,从多个第一候选设备中确定至少一个第一设备;其中,该先验信息包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备的位置、第二设备与第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系、第一候选设备对应的历史单播上下文信息或历史组播上下文信息、第二设备与第一候选设备之间的信道条件。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method also includes: determining at least one first device from multiple first candidate devices based on prior information between the second device and multiple first candidate devices; wherein the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the second device and the first candidate device, historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the second device and the first candidate device.
在上述实施例中,通过先验信息确定至少一个第一设备,可以加快第二设备确定至少一个第一设备的速度,进而可以减少定位时延。In the above embodiment, by determining at least one first device through prior information, the speed at which the second device determines at least one first device can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
在一种可能的实施方式中,本申请涉及的第一候选设备的位置可以包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备的经纬度坐标或该经纬度坐标的经纬度坐标区间值。在又一种可能的实施方式中,本申请涉及的第一候选设备的位置可以包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备所在小区或第一候选设备所在跟踪区等。在另一种可能的实施方式中,本申请涉及的第一候选设备的位置可以是第一候选设备的相对位置,如第一候选设备相对于第二设备的方向和距离,或,第一候选设备相对于某个基站(该基站可以覆盖第二设备,也可以不覆盖第二设备)的方向和距离。In one possible implementation, the location of the first candidate device involved in the present application may include at least one of the following: the longitude and latitude coordinates of the first candidate device or the longitude and latitude coordinate interval value of the longitude and latitude coordinates. In another possible implementation, the location of the first candidate device involved in the present application may include at least one of the following: the cell where the first candidate device is located or the tracking area where the first candidate device is located. In another possible implementation, the location of the first candidate device involved in the present application may be the relative position of the first candidate device, such as the direction and distance of the first candidate device relative to the second device, or the direction and distance of the first candidate device relative to a base station (the base station may or may not cover the second device).
在一种可能的实施方式中,第二设备与多个第一候选设备中任意一个第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系可以包括之前建立通信连接或未建立通信连接。在另一种可能的实施方式中,第二设备与多个第一候选设备中任意一个第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系可以包括已建立通信连接或未建立通信连接。当第二设备将某个第一候选设备作为第一设备,且第二设备与该第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系为之前建立通信连接时,第二设备可以基于该第一候选设备对应的历史单播上下文信息或历史组播上下文信息,与该第一候选设备建立通信连接。当第二设备将某个第一候选设备作为第一设备,且第二设备与该第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系为未建立通信连接时,第二设备可以与该第一候选设备建立通信连接。In one possible implementation, the communication connection relationship between the second device and any one of the multiple first candidate devices may include a previously established communication connection or a previously unestablished communication connection. In another possible implementation, the communication connection relationship between the second device and any one of the multiple first candidate devices may include an established communication connection or a previously unestablished communication connection. When the second device uses a first candidate device as the first device, and the communication connection relationship between the second device and the first candidate device is a previously established communication connection, the second device may establish a communication connection with the first candidate device based on the historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device. When the second device uses a first candidate device as the first device, and the communication connection relationship between the second device and the first candidate device is a previously unestablished communication connection, the second device may establish a communication connection with the first candidate device.
其中,多个第一候选设备中各个第一候选设备对应的历史单播上下文信息可以包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备的标识(如第一候选设备的L1 ID、L2 ID或L3 ID)、第二设备与多个第一候选设备间的历史服务类型标识、第二设备与多个第一候选设备间的历史侧行链路对应的车到万物(vehicle to everything,V2X)服务质量特性标识等。多个第一候选设备中各个第一候选设备对应的历史组播上下文信息可以包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备所在组的组标识、第二设备与多个第一候选设备间的历史服务类型标识、第二设备与多个第一候选设备间的历史侧行链路对应的V2X服务质量特性标识。The historical unicast context information corresponding to each of the multiple first candidate devices may include at least one of the following: an identifier of the first candidate device (such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID of the first candidate device), a historical service type identifier between the second device and the multiple first candidate devices, a vehicle to everything (V2X) service quality characteristic identifier corresponding to the historical sidelink between the second device and the multiple first candidate devices, etc. The historical multicast context information corresponding to each of the multiple first candidate devices may include at least one of the following: a group identifier of the group to which the first candidate device belongs, a historical service type identifier between the second device and the multiple first candidate devices, and a V2X service quality characteristic identifier corresponding to the historical sidelink between the second device and the multiple first candidate devices.
需要指出的是,本申请涉及的历史服务类型标识可以用于标识PC5链路上的V2X服务类型,如定位服务信息或道路预警信息等。服务质量特性标识可以用于标识PC5链路的服务质量,如调度优先级等。It should be noted that the historical service type identifier involved in this application can be used to identify the V2X service type on the PC5 link, such as positioning service information or road warning information, etc. The service quality characteristic identifier can be used to identify the service quality of the PC5 link, such as scheduling priority, etc.
本申请涉及的信道条件例如可以包括以下至少一项:参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power,RSRP)、参考信号接收质量(reference signal received quality,RSRQ)、信号干扰噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR)、路径损失或路径类型。该路径类型包括直射径(line of sight,LOS)和/或非射径(non-line of sight,NLOS)。The channel conditions involved in the present application may include, for example, at least one of the following: reference signal received power (RSRP), reference signal received quality (RSRQ), signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), path loss or path type. The path type includes line of sight (LOS) and/or non-line of sight (NLOS).
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自终端设备的第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定第一设备。这提醒了第二设备要确定参与定位终端设备的第一设备,也表明终端设备无需进行ProSe直接发现,降低了终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也减少了定位时延。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving first information from a terminal device, the first information being used to request determination of a first device. This reminds the second device to determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device, and also indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, thereby reducing the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery and also reducing positioning delay.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第一设备的第一设备的标识;向定位服务器发送第一标识信息、第一设备的标识和第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址。这使得定位服务器可以获知参与定位终端设备的设备有哪些,进而可以向这些设备发送相应的测量请求。In conjunction with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; and sending the first identifier information, the identifier of the first device, and third identifier information to a positioning server, wherein the third identifier information is used to identify the second device, the device group or the broadcast address to which the second device belongs. This enables the positioning server to know which devices are involved in positioning the terminal device, and then to send corresponding measurement requests to these devices.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第一设备的第一设备的标识;向定位服务器发送第一标识信息和第一设备的标识。这使得定位服务器可以获知第一设备的标识,进而可以根据第一设备的标识,向第一设备发送相应的测量请求。In conjunction with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; and sending the first identifier information and the identifier of the first device to the positioning server. This enables the positioning server to learn the identifier of the first device, and then send a corresponding measurement request to the first device according to the identifier of the first device.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,向定位服务器发送第一标识信息和第一设备的标识之前,该方法还包括:接收来自定位服务器的第一请求消息,第一请求消息用于请求第一设备的标识。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, before sending the first identification information and the identification of the first device to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a first request message from the positioning server, where the first request message is used to request the identification of the first device.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第一设备的第一设备的标识;向终端设备发送第一设备的标识。这使得终端设备可以获知参与定位的设备包括第一设备。In conjunction with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; and sending the identifier of the first device to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can know that the devices involved in positioning include the first device.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:向第一设备或终端设备发送第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending third identification information to the first device or the terminal device, where the third identification information is used to identify the second device, a device group to which the second device belongs, or a broadcast address.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:根据第一标识信息,接收来自终端设备的 侧行定位参考信号;根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第二测量结果。这表明第二设备可以根据侧行定位参考信号对终端设备进行定位测量。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving, according to the first identification information, a sidewalk positioning reference signal; perform positioning measurement according to the sidewalk positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result. This indicates that the second device can perform positioning measurement on the terminal device according to the sidewalk positioning reference signal.
其中,第二测量结果包括以下至少一项:终端设备到第二设备的RTOA、TOA、AOA、RSRP、RSRPP、径到达时间、径到达角、参考信号多普勒分量、参考信号径多普勒分量、终端设备速度等中的一项或多项。Among them, the second measurement result includes at least one of the following: one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, terminal device speed, etc. from the terminal device to the second device.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:获取侧行定位参考信号对应的SCI;根据第一标识信息,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,包括:当SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method also includes: obtaining the SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal; receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information, including: when the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
在上述实施方式中,在侧行定位参考信号对应的SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,第二设备可以接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,避免了第二设备错误接收侧行定位参考信号的情况。In the above implementation, when the second identification information included in the SCI corresponding to the sideline positioning reference signal is the same as the first identification information, the second device can receive the sideline positioning reference signal from the terminal device, thereby avoiding the situation where the second device erroneously receives the sideline positioning reference signal.
可选的,该SCI还包括第四标识信息,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,包括:当第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同,且第四标识信息与第三标识信息相同时,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号。Optionally, the SCI also includes fourth identification information, and receives a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device, including: when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第二测量结果之前,该方法还包括:接收来自定位服务器的第二测量请求,第二测量请求用于指示第二定位类型。如,终端设备到第二设备的RTOA、TOA、AOA、RSRP、RSRPP、径到达时间、径到达角、参考信号多普勒分量、参考信号径多普勒分量、终端设备速度等中的一项或多项。这使得第二设备可以获知相应的定位类型有哪些。In combination with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, before performing positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result, the method further includes: receiving a second measurement request from the positioning server, the second measurement request is used to indicate a second positioning type. For example, one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, terminal device speed, etc. from the terminal device to the second device. This allows the second device to know what the corresponding positioning types are.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第一设备的第一测量结果;根据第二测量结果和第一测量结果,确定终端设备的位置信息;向终端设备发送终端设备的位置信息。这表明第二设备可以根据各个测量结果,确定终端设备的位置。In conjunction with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving a first measurement result from the first device; determining location information of the terminal device according to the second measurement result and the first measurement result; and sending the location information of the terminal device to the terminal device. This indicates that the second device can determine the location of the terminal device according to each measurement result.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:向第一设备发送第一测量请求,第一测量请求用于指示第一定位类型。这使得第一设备可以获知相应的定位类型有哪些。In conjunction with the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending a first measurement request to the first device, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type, so that the first device can learn which corresponding positioning types there are.
第三方面,提供一种定位方法,该方法应用于终端设备,该方法包括:生成第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于第一设备进行定位测量,终端设备与第一设备之间未建立通信链路;向第二设备或定位服务器发送第一标识信息。According to a third aspect, a positioning method is provided, which is applied to a terminal device, and the method includes: generating first identification information, the first identification information is used for a first device to perform positioning measurement, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device; and sending the first identification information to a second device or a positioning server.
在上述实施方式中,终端设备可以向第二设备或定位服务器发送第一标识信息,这使得第一设备可以通过第二设备或定位服务器获取第一标识信息,进而在第一设备未与终端设备建立通信连接的情况下,可以根据第一标识信息来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号并进行定位测量,这减少了终端设备的ProSe直接发现过程以及终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接所需的信令开销。In the above implementation, the terminal device can send the first identification information to the second device or the positioning server, so that the first device can obtain the first identification information through the second device or the positioning server, and then when the first device does not establish a communication connection with the terminal device, the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device can be obtained according to the first identification information and the positioning measurement can be performed, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:向第二设备或定位服务器发送第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定第一设备。这提醒了第二设备或定位服务器要确定参与定位终端设备的第一设备,也表明终端设备无需进行ProSe直接发现,降低了终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也减少了定位时延。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending first information to the second device or the positioning server, where the first information is used to request to determine the first device. This reminds the second device or the positioning server to determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device, and also indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, thereby reducing the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery and reducing the positioning delay.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第二设备的第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址;向定位服务器发送第三标识信息。这使得定位服务器可以获知第三标识信息。In conjunction with the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving third identification information from the second device, the third identification information being used to identify the second device, the device group or the broadcast address to which the second device belongs; and sending the third identification information to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can learn the third identification information.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,向定位服务器发送第三标识信息之前,该方法还包括:接收来自定位服务器的第二请求消息,第二请求消息用于请求第三标识信息。这表明终端设备可以是在收到第二请求消息后,再向定位服务器发送第三标识信息。In conjunction with the third aspect, in a possible implementation, before sending the third identification information to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a second request message from the positioning server, the second request message being used to request the third identification information. This indicates that the terminal device may send the third identification information to the positioning server after receiving the second request message.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,在向第二设备发送第一信息的情况下,该方法还包括:接收来自第二设备的第一设备的标识和第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址;向定位服务器发送第一设备的标识和第三标识信息。这表明终端设备可以向定位服务器发送第一设备的标识和第三标识信息,以使得定位服务器可以获知参与定位终端设备的设备有哪些,进而可以向这些设备发送相应的测量请求。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation, when sending the first information to the second device, the method further includes: receiving the identification and third identification information of the first device from the second device, the third identification information being used to identify the second device, the device group or the broadcast address to which the second device belongs; and sending the identification and third identification information of the first device to the positioning server. This indicates that the terminal device can send the identification and third identification information of the first device to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can know which devices are involved in positioning the terminal device, and then can send corresponding measurement requests to these devices.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,向定位服务器发送第一设备的标识和第三标识信息之前,该方法还包括:接收来自定位服务器的第三请求消息,第三请求消息用于请求第一设备的标识和第三标识信息。这表明终端设备可以是在收到第三请求消息后,再向定位服务器发送第一设备的标识和第三标识信息。In conjunction with the third aspect, in a possible implementation, before sending the identifier and third identifier information of the first device to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a third request message from the positioning server, the third request message being used to request the identifier and third identifier information of the first device. This indicates that the terminal device may send the identifier and third identifier information of the first device to the positioning server after receiving the third request message.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:发送侧行定位参考信号,侧行定位参考信 号用于第一设备和第二设备进行定位测量。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: sending a sideways positioning reference signal, the sideways positioning reference signal The signal is used by the first device and the second device to perform positioning measurement.
结合第三方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第二设备的终端设备的位置信息。In combination with the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving location information of a terminal device from a second device.
第四方面,提供一种定位方法,该方法应用于定位服务器,该方法包括:接收来自终端设备的第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识终端设备,终端设备与第一设备之间未建立通信链路,第一设备用于对终端设备进行定位测量;向第一设备发送第一标识信息。In a fourth aspect, a positioning method is provided, which is applied to a positioning server, and the method includes: receiving first identification information from a terminal device, the first identification information is used to identify the terminal device, no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device, and the first device is used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device; sending the first identification information to the first device.
在上述实施方式中,定位服务器获取第一标识信息,并将第一标识信息发送给第一设备,使得第一设备在未与终端设备建立通信连接的情况下,可以根据第一标识信息来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,这减少了终端设备的ProSe直接发现过程以及终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接所需的信令开销。In the above implementation, the positioning server obtains the first identification information and sends the first identification information to the first device, so that the first device can obtain the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information when the communication connection with the terminal device is not established, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自终端设备的第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定第一设备;确定第一设备。这表明定位服务器可以确定参与定位终端设备的第一设备,也表明终端设备无需进行ProSe直接发现,降低了终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也减少了定位时延。In conjunction with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving first information from a terminal device, the first information being used to request determination of a first device; and determining the first device. This indicates that the positioning server can determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device, and also indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, thereby reducing the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, and also reducing the positioning delay.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自终端设备的第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址,第二设备用于对终端设备进行定位测量;根据第三标识信息,确定第二设备与多个第一候选设备之间的先验信息;确定第一设备,包括:根据先验信息,从多个第一候选设备中确定第一设备。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method also includes: receiving third identification information from a terminal device, the third identification information is used to identify a second device, a device group or a broadcast address where the second device is located, and the second device is used to perform positioning measurements on the terminal device; determining, based on the third identification information, prior information between the second device and a plurality of first candidate devices; determining the first device, including: determining the first device from a plurality of first candidate devices based on the prior information.
在上述实施例中,通过先验信息确定第一设备,可以加快定位服务器确定第一设备的速度,进而可以减少定位时延。In the above embodiment, by determining the first device through a priori information, the speed at which the positioning server determines the first device can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,先验信息包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备的位置、第二设备与第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系、第一候选设备对应的历史单播上下文信息或历史组播上下文信息、第二设备与第一候选设备之间的信道条件。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the second device and the first candidate device, the historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the second device and the first candidate device.
结合第四方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:向第一设备发送第三标识信息。In combination with the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending third identification information to the first device.
第五方面,提供一种定位方法,该方法应用于第二设备,该方法包括:接收来自终端设备的第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定第一设备,第一设备用于对终端设备进行定位测量,终端设备与第一设备之间未建立通信链路;确定第一设备。In a fifth aspect, a positioning method is provided, which is applied to a second device, and the method includes: receiving first information from a terminal device, the first information is used to request the determination of a first device, the first device is used to perform positioning measurements on the terminal device, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device; determining the first device.
上述实施方式中,第二设备在获取第一信息后,可以确定参与定位终端设备的第一设备,这表明终端设备无需进行ProSe直接发现,降低了终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也减少了定位时延。另外,终端设备与第一设备之间未建立通信链路,这可以降低终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接所需的信令开销。In the above implementation, after obtaining the first information, the second device can determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device, which indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, which reduces the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery and also reduces the positioning delay. In addition, no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device, which can reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,确定第一设备,包括:根据第二设备与多个第一候选设备之间的先验信息,从多个第一候选设备中确定第一设备;其中,先验信息包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备的位置、第二设备与第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系、第一候选设备对应的历史单播上下文信息或历史组播上下文信息、第二设备与第一候选设备之间的信道条件。In combination with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, determining the first device includes: determining the first device from multiple first candidate devices based on prior information between the second device and the multiple first candidate devices; wherein the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the second device and the first candidate device, historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the second device and the first candidate device.
在上述实施例中,通过先验信息确定第一设备,可以加快第二设备确定第一设备的速度,进而可以减少定位时延。In the above embodiment, by determining the first device through a priori information, the speed at which the second device determines the first device can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自终端设备的第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识终端设备;向第一设备发送第一标识信息。In combination with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving first identification information from a terminal device, the first identification information being used to identify the terminal device; and sending the first identification information to the first device.
在上述实施方式中,第二设备可以从终端设备获取第一标识信息,进而可以向第一设备发送第一标识信息,以使得在第一设备未与终端设备建立通信连接的情况下可以根据第一标识信息来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,这减少了终端设备的ProSe直接发现过程以及终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接所需的信令开销。In the above implementation, the second device can obtain the first identification information from the terminal device, and then send the first identification information to the first device, so that when the first device does not establish a communication connection with the terminal device, the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device can be obtained according to the first identification information, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第一设备的第一设备的标识;向定位服务器发送第一标识信息、第一设备的标识和第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址。这使得定位服务器可以获知参与定位终端设备的设备有哪些,进而可以向这些设备发送相应的测量请求。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; and sending the first identifier information, the identifier of the first device, and third identifier information to a positioning server, wherein the third identifier information is used to identify the second device, the device group or the broadcast address to which the second device belongs. This enables the positioning server to know which devices are involved in positioning the terminal device, and then to send corresponding measurement requests to these devices.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第一设备的第一设备的标识;向 定位服务器发送第一标识信息和第一设备的标识。这使得定位服务器可以获知第一设备的标识,进而可以根据第一设备的标识,向第一设备发送相应的测量请求。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; The positioning server sends the first identification information and the identification of the first device, so that the positioning server can learn the identification of the first device, and then send a corresponding measurement request to the first device according to the identification of the first device.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,向定位服务器发送第一标识信息和第一设备的标识之前,该方法还包括:接收来自定位服务器的第一请求消息,第一请求消息用于请求第一设备的标识。In combination with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, before sending the first identification information and the identification of the first device to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a first request message from the positioning server, where the first request message is used to request the identification of the first device.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第一设备的第一设备的标识;向终端设备发送第一设备的标识。这使得终端设备可以获知参与定位的设备包括第一设备。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving an identifier of the first device from the first device; and sending the identifier of the first device to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can know that the devices involved in positioning include the first device.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:向第一设备或终端设备发送第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址。In combination with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending third identification information to the first device or the terminal device, where the third identification information is used to identify the second device, the device group to which the second device belongs, or the broadcast address.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:根据第一标识信息,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号;根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第二测量结果。这表明第二设备可以根据侧行定位参考信号对终端设备进行定位测量。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information; and performing positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result. This indicates that the second device can perform positioning measurement on the terminal device according to the side positioning reference signal.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:获取侧行定位参考信号对应的SCI;根据第一标识信息,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,包括:当SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号。In combination with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method also includes: obtaining the SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal; receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information, including: when the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
在上述实施方式中,在侧行定位参考信号对应的SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,第二设备可以接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,避免了第二设备错误接收侧行定位参考信号的情况。In the above implementation, when the second identification information included in the SCI corresponding to the sideline positioning reference signal is the same as the first identification information, the second device can receive the sideline positioning reference signal from the terminal device, thereby avoiding the situation where the second device erroneously receives the sideline positioning reference signal.
可选的,该SCI还包括第四标识信息,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,包括:当第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同,且第四标识信息与第三标识信息相同时,接收来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号。Optionally, the SCI also includes fourth identification information, and receives a side positioning reference signal from the terminal device, including: when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, receiving the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第二测量结果之前,该方法还包括:接收来自定位服务器的第二测量请求,第二测量请求用于指示第二定位类型。这使得第二设备可以获知相应的定位类型有哪些。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, before performing positioning measurement according to the sideways positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result, the method further includes: receiving a second measurement request from a positioning server, the second measurement request being used to indicate a second positioning type. This enables the second device to know which corresponding positioning types are.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第一设备的第一测量结果;根据第二测量结果和第一测量结果,确定终端设备的位置信息;向终端设备发送终端设备的位置信息。这表明第二设备可以根据各个测量结果,确定终端设备的位置。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving a first measurement result from the first device; determining location information of the terminal device according to the second measurement result and the first measurement result; and sending the location information of the terminal device to the terminal device. This indicates that the second device can determine the location of the terminal device according to each measurement result.
结合第五方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:向第一设备发送第一测量请求,第一测量请求用于指示第一定位类型。这使得第一设备可以获知相应的定位类型有哪些。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending a first measurement request to the first device, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type, so that the first device can learn which corresponding positioning types there are.
第六方面,提供一种定位方法,该方法应用于终端设备,该方法包括:生成第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定第一设备,第一设备用于对终端设备进行定位测量;向第二设备或定位服务器发送第一信息。In a sixth aspect, a positioning method is provided, which is applied to a terminal device, and the method includes: generating first information, the first information is used to request to determine a first device, and the first device is used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device; and sending the first information to a second device or a positioning server.
上述实施方式中,终端设备可以向第二设备或定位服务器发送第一信息,使得第二设备或定位服务器在获取第一信息后,可以确定参与定位终端设备的第一设备,这表明终端设备无需进行ProSe直接发现,降低了终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也减少了定位时延。In the above implementation, the terminal device can send the first information to the second device or the positioning server, so that the second device or the positioning server can determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device after obtaining the first information. This indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, which reduces the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery and also reduces the positioning delay.
结合第六方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:向第二设备或定位服务器发送第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识终端设备,终端设备与第一设备之间未建立通信链路。In combination with the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending first identification information to the second device or the positioning server, where the first identification information is used to identify the terminal device, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device.
在上述实施方式中,终端设备可以向第二设备或定位服务器发送第一标识信息,这使得第一设备在未与终端设备建立通信连接的情况下,可以通过第二设备或定位服务器获取第一标识信息,进而可以根据第一标识信息来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,这减少了终端设备的ProSe直接发现过程以及终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接所需的信令开销。In the above implementation, the terminal device can send the first identification information to the second device or the positioning server, so that the first device can obtain the first identification information through the second device or the positioning server without establishing a communication connection with the terminal device, and then can obtain the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device based on the first identification information, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
结合第六方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第二设备的第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址;向定位服务器发送第三标识信息。这使得定位服务器可以获知第三标识信息。In conjunction with the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving third identification information from the second device, the third identification information being used to identify the second device, a device group or a broadcast address to which the second device belongs; and sending the third identification information to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can learn the third identification information.
结合第六方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,向定位服务器发送第三标识信息之前,该方法还包括:接收来自定位服务器的第二请求消息,第二请求消息用于请求第三标识信息。这表明终端设备可以是在收到第二请求消息后,再向定位服务器发送第三标识信息。In conjunction with the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation, before sending the third identification information to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a second request message from the positioning server, where the second request message is used to request the third identification information. This indicates that the terminal device may send the third identification information to the positioning server after receiving the second request message.
结合第六方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,在向第二设备发送第一信息的情况下,该方法还包括:接收来自第二设备的第一设备的标识和第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址;向定位服务器发送第一设备的标识和第三标识信息。这表明终端设备可以向定位服务器发送第一设备的标识和第三标识信息,以使得定位服务器可以获知参与定位终端设备的设备有哪些,进而可以向这些设备发送相应的测量请求。 In conjunction with the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation, when sending the first information to the second device, the method further includes: receiving the identification and third identification information of the first device from the second device, the third identification information being used to identify the second device, the device group or the broadcast address to which the second device belongs; and sending the identification and third identification information of the first device to the positioning server. This indicates that the terminal device can send the identification and third identification information of the first device to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can know which devices are involved in positioning the terminal device, and can then send corresponding measurement requests to these devices.
结合第六方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,向定位服务器发送第一设备的标识和第三标识信息之前,该方法还包括:接收来自定位服务器的第三请求消息,第三请求消息用于请求第一设备的标识和第三标识信息。这表明终端设备可以是在收到第三请求消息后,再向定位服务器发送第一设备的标识和第三标识信息。In conjunction with the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation, before sending the identifier and third identifier information of the first device to the positioning server, the method further includes: receiving a third request message from the positioning server, where the third request message is used to request the identifier and third identifier information of the first device. This indicates that the terminal device may send the identifier and third identifier information of the first device to the positioning server after receiving the third request message.
结合第六方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:发送侧行定位参考信号,侧行定位参考信号用于第一设备和第二设备进行定位测量。In combination with the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending a sideways positioning reference signal, where the sideways positioning reference signal is used for the first device and the second device to perform positioning measurements.
结合第六方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自第二设备的终端设备的位置信息。In combination with the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving location information of a terminal device from a second device.
第七方面,提供一种定位方法,该方法应用于定位服务器,该方法包括:接收来自终端设备的第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定第一设备,第一设备用于对终端设备进行定位测量;确定第一设备。In a seventh aspect, a positioning method is provided, which is applied to a positioning server, and the method includes: receiving first information from a terminal device, the first information is used to request to determine a first device, and the first device is used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device; and determining the first device.
上述实施方式中,定位服务器可以接收第一信息,在获取第一信息后,定位服务器可以确定参与定位终端设备的第一设备,这表明终端设备无需进行ProSe直接发现,降低了终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也减少了定位时延。In the above implementation, the positioning server can receive the first information. After obtaining the first information, the positioning server can determine the first device involved in positioning the terminal device, which indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, thereby reducing the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery and also reducing the positioning delay.
结合第七方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自终端设备的第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识第二设备、第二设备所在的设备组或广播地址,第二设备用于对终端设备进行定位测量;根据第三标识信息,确定第二设备与多个第一候选设备之间的先验信息;确定第一设备,包括:根据先验信息,从多个第一候选设备中确定第一设备。In combination with the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation, the method also includes: receiving third identification information from a terminal device, the third identification information is used to identify a second device, a device group or a broadcast address where the second device is located, and the second device is used to perform positioning measurements on the terminal device; determining, based on the third identification information, prior information between the second device and a plurality of first candidate devices; determining the first device, including: determining the first device from a plurality of first candidate devices based on the prior information.
在上述实施例中,通过先验信息确定第一设备,可以加快定位服务器确定第一设备的速度,进而可以减少定位时延。In the above embodiment, by determining the first device through a priori information, the speed at which the positioning server determines the first device can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
结合第七方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,先验信息包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备的位置、第二设备与第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系、第一候选设备对应的历史单播上下文信息或历史组播上下文信息、第二设备与第一候选设备之间的信道条件。In combination with the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation, the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the second device and the first candidate device, the historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the second device and the first candidate device.
结合第七方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:向第一设备发送第三标识信息。In combination with the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: sending third identification information to the first device.
结合第七方面,在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自终端设备的第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识终端设备,终端设备与第一设备之间未建立通信链路;向第一设备发送第一标识信息。In combination with the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation, the method also includes: receiving first identification information from a terminal device, the first identification information is used to identify the terminal device, and no communication link is established between the terminal device and the first device; and sending the first identification information to the first device.
在上述实施方式中,定位服务器可以从终端设备获取第一标识信息,进而可以向第一设备发送第一标识信息,以使得第一设备在未与终端设备建立通信连接的情况下,可以根据第一标识信息来自终端设备的侧行定位参考信号,这减少了终端设备的ProSe直接发现过程以及终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低终端设备进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低终端设备与第一设备建立通信连接所需的信令开销。In the above implementation, the positioning server can obtain the first identification information from the terminal device, and then send the first identification information to the first device, so that the first device can obtain the side positioning reference signal from the terminal device according to the first identification information when the communication connection with the terminal device is not established, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the terminal device and the process of establishing a communication connection between the terminal device and the first device. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the terminal device to establish a communication connection with the first device.
第八方面,提供一种通信装置,包括用于实现如第一方面至第七方面中任一项所述方法的单元或模块。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising a unit or module for implementing the method as described in any one of the first to seventh aspects.
第九方面,提供一种通信装置,通信装置包括至少一个处理器和存储器;其中,存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令;至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中的计算机程序或指令,使得第一方面至第八方面中任一项所述的方法被执行。In a ninth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising at least one processor and a memory; wherein the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions; and at least one processor is used to execute the computer programs or instructions in the memory, so that any method described in any one of the first aspect to the eighth aspect is executed.
第十方面,提供一种通信系统,通信系统包括第一设备、第二设备和终端设备;第一设备用于执行如第一方面中任一项所述的方法;第二设备用于执行如第二方面或第五方面中任一项所述的方法;终端设备用于执行如第三方面或第六方面中任一项所述的方法。In the tenth aspect, a communication system is provided, the communication system comprising a first device, a second device and a terminal device; the first device is used to execute a method as described in any one of the first aspect; the second device is used to execute a method as described in any one of the second aspect or the fifth aspect; the terminal device is used to execute a method as described in any one of the third aspect or the sixth aspect.
第十一方面,提供一种通信系统,通信系统包括第一设备、终端设备和定位服务器;第一设备用于执行如第一方面中任一项所述的方法;终端设备用于执行如第三方面或第六方面中任一项所述的方法;定位服务器用于执行如第四方面或第七方面中任一项所述的方法。In the eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided, the communication system comprising a first device, a terminal device and a positioning server; the first device is used to execute a method as described in any one of the first aspect; the terminal device is used to execute a method as described in any one of the third aspect or the sixth aspect; the positioning server is used to execute a method as described in any one of the fourth aspect or the seventh aspect.
第十二方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令被执行时,使计算机执行如第一方面至第七方面中任一项所述的方法。In a twelfth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed, the computer executes the method as described in any one of aspects 1 to 7.
第十三方面,提供一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码被计算机运行时,使得计算机执行如第一方面至第七方面中任一项所述的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, a computer program product is provided, the computer program product comprising: a computer program code, when the computer program code is executed by a computer, the computer executes a method as described in any one of the first to seventh aspects.
第十四方面,提供一种芯片,该芯片与存储器耦合,用于读取并执行存储器中的程序指令,以使得芯片所在装置实现第一方面至第七方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, a chip is provided, which is coupled to a memory and is used to read and execute program instructions in the memory so that the device where the chip is located implements the method described in any possible implementation method of the first to seventh aspects.
下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍。The following is a brief introduction to the drawings required for describing the embodiments.
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的基础架构;FIG1 is a basic architecture of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例适用的一种具体可能的网络架构示意图; FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a specific possible network architecture applicable to an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种定位方法的流程示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of a positioning method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的又一种定位方法的流程示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of another positioning method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的又一种定位方法的流程示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of another positioning method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种网络覆盖下的定位方法的流程示意图;FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of a positioning method under network coverage provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种无网络覆盖下的定位方法的流程示意图;FIG7 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of a positioning method without network coverage provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的又一种网络覆盖下的定位方法的流程示意图;FIG8 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of another positioning method under network coverage provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG9 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种简化的UE的结构示意图。FIG10 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a simplified UE provided in an embodiment of the present application.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。其中,本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。除非另有说明,“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。并且,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是一个,也可以是多个。另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对网元和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Among them, the terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of the present application can be used interchangeably. Unless otherwise specified, "/" indicates that the objects associated before and after are in an "or" relationship. For example, A/B can represent A or B; "and/or" in this application is only a description of the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. These three situations, where A and B can be singular or plural. And, in the description of the present application, unless otherwise specified, "multiple" refers to two or more than two. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be one or more. In addition, in order to clearly describe the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as "first" and "second" are used to distinguish between network elements and identical or similar items with substantially the same functions. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the quantity and execution order, and words such as "first" and "second" do not necessarily limit the difference.
在本申请实施例中描述的参考“一个实施例”或“一些实施例”等意味着在本申请的一个或多个实施例中包括结合该实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特点。由此,在本说明书中的不同之处出现的语句“在一个实施例中”、“在一些实施例中”、“在其他一些实施例中”、“在另外一些实施例中”等不是必然都参考相同的实施例,而是意味着“一个或多个但不是所有的实施例”,除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。术语“包括”、“包含”、“具有”及它们的变形都意味着“包括但不限于”,除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。References to "one embodiment" or "some embodiments" etc. described in the embodiments of the present application mean that one or more embodiments of the present application include specific features, structures or characteristics described in conjunction with the embodiment. Therefore, the statements "in one embodiment", "in some embodiments", "in some other embodiments", "in some other embodiments", etc. that appear in different places in this specification do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment, but mean "one or more but not all embodiments", unless otherwise specifically emphasized in other ways. The terms "including", "comprising", "having" and their variations all mean "including but not limited to", unless otherwise specifically emphasized in other ways.
以下的具体实施方式,对本申请的目标、技术方案和有益效果进行了进一步详细说明,所应理解的是,以下仅为本申请的具体实施方式而已,并不用于限定本申请的保护范围,凡在本申请的技术方案的基础之上,所做的任何修改、等同替换、改进等,均应包括在本申请的保护范围之内。The following specific implementation methods further describe in detail the objectives, technical solutions and beneficial effects of the present application. It should be understood that the following are only specific implementation methods of the present application and are not intended to limit the scope of protection of the present application. Any modifications, equivalent substitutions, improvements, etc. made on the basis of the technical solutions of the present application should be included in the scope of protection of the present application.
在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In the various embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified or provided in a logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between the different embodiments are consistent and may be referenced to each other, and the technical features in the different embodiments may be combined to form new embodiments according to their inherent logical relationships.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的通信系统的基础架构。The following introduces the basic architecture of the communication system provided by the embodiments of the present application.
参见图1,图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的基础架构。在图1的1-1中,该通信系统可以包括至少一个第一设备(图1仅示出两个第一设备,即第一设备101和第一设备102)和第二设备103。其中,第一设备101和第一设备102可以与第二设备103进行侧行链路通信。可选的,该通信系统还可以包括终端设备104。终端设备104可以与第二设备103进行侧行链路通信。终端设备104与第一设备101和第一设备102之间未建立通信链路。另外,该通信系统还可以包括网络设备105和定位服务器106,第一设备101、第一设备102、第二设备103和终端设备104还可以通过网络设备105与定位服务器106通信。示例性的,该通信系统还可以包括接入和移动性管理设备107,网络设备105可以通过接入和移动性管理设备107将来自第一设备101、第一设备102、第二设备103和终端设备104的各种信令和/或数据等分别发送到定位服务器106,还可以将来自定位服务器106的各种信令和/或数据通过接入和移动性管理设备107分别发送给第一设备101、第一设备102、第二设备103和终端设备104。Referring to Figure 1, Figure 1 is an infrastructure of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application. In 1-1 of Figure 1, the communication system may include at least one first device (Figure 1 only shows two first devices, namely, the first device 101 and the first device 102) and a second device 103. Among them, the first device 101 and the first device 102 can perform side link communication with the second device 103. Optionally, the communication system may also include a terminal device 104. The terminal device 104 can perform side link communication with the second device 103. No communication link is established between the terminal device 104 and the first device 101 and the first device 102. In addition, the communication system may also include a network device 105 and a positioning server 106, and the first device 101, the first device 102, the second device 103 and the terminal device 104 may also communicate with the positioning server 106 through the network device 105. Exemplarily, the communication system may further include an access and mobility management device 107. The network device 105 may respectively send various signaling and/or data from the first device 101, the first device 102, the second device 103 and the terminal device 104 to the positioning server 106 through the access and mobility management device 107, and may also respectively send various signaling and/or data from the positioning server 106 to the first device 101, the first device 102, the second device 103 and the terminal device 104 through the access and mobility management device 107.
在图1的1-2中,该通信系统可以包括至少一个第一设备(图1仅示出两个第一设备,即第一设备111和第一设备112)和第二设备113。其中,第一设备111和第一设备112可以与第二设备113进行侧行链路通信。可选的,该通信系统还可以包括终端设备114。终端设备114可以与第二设备113进行侧行链路通信。终端设备114与第一设备111和第一设备112之间未建立通信链路。In 1-2 of FIG. 1 , the communication system may include at least one first device (FIG. 1 only shows two first devices, namely, the first device 111 and the first device 112) and a second device 113. The first device 111 and the first device 112 may perform sidelink communication with the second device 113. Optionally, the communication system may further include a terminal device 114. The terminal device 114 may perform sidelink communication with the second device 113. No communication link is established between the terminal device 114 and the first device 111 and the first device 112.
需要指出的是,图1仅为示例,不应视为对本申请的具体限定。下面再对通信系统所涉及的各个设备进行详细说明。It should be noted that Fig. 1 is only an example and should not be regarded as a specific limitation of the present application.
一、第一设备1. First Equipment
第一设备是用户侧的一种用于接收信号,或者,发送信号,或者,接收信号和发送信号的实体。第一设备用于向用户提供语音服务和数据连通性服务中的一种或多种。第一设备可以为包含无线收发功能、且 可以与网络设备配合为用户提供通讯服务的设备。具体地,第一设备可以指用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理、用户装置或路边单元(road side unit,RSU)。第一设备也可以是无人机、物联网(internet of things,IoT)设备、无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)中的站点(station,ST)、蜂窝电话(cellular phone)、智能电话(smart phone)、无绳电话、无线数据卡、平板型电脑、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)设备、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、机器类型通信(machine type communication,MTC)终端、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备(也可以称为穿戴式智能设备)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。第一设备还可以为5G系统中的终端,也可以为下一代通信系统中的终端,本申请实施例对此不作限定。可选的,第一设备可以称为锚点设备。The first device is an entity on the user side that is used to receive signals, or send signals, or receive and send signals. The first device is used to provide one or more of voice services and data connectivity services to the user. The first device can be a device that includes wireless transceiver functions and A device that can cooperate with a network device to provide communication services to a user. Specifically, the first device may refer to user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, user device or road side unit (RSU). The first device may also be a drone, an Internet of Things (IoT) device, a station (ST) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a cellular phone, a smart phone, a cordless phone, a wireless data card, a tablet computer, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA) device, a laptop computer, a machine type communication (MTC) terminal, a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device (also referred to as a wearable smart device), a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in self driving, a wireless terminal in transportation safety, a wireless terminal in a smart city, a wireless terminal in a smart home, etc. The first device may also be a terminal in a 5G system or a terminal in a next generation communication system, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. Optionally, the first device may be referred to as an anchor device.
本申请的实施例对第一设备的设备形态不做限定,用于实现第一设备的功能的装置可以是第一设备;也可以是能够支持第一设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。该装置可以被安装在第一设备中或者和第一设备匹配使用。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。The embodiments of the present application do not limit the device form of the first device. The device for implementing the function of the first device may be the first device; or it may be a device that can support the first device to implement the function, such as a chip system. The device may be installed in the first device or used in combination with the first device. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices.
需要指出的是,本申请涉及的第一设备可以用于对终端设备进行定位测量。It should be pointed out that the first device involved in the present application can be used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device.
二、第二设备2. Second Equipment
第二设备是用户侧的一种用于接收信号,或者,发送信号,或者,接收信号和发送信号的实体。第二设备用于向用户提供语音服务和数据连通性服务中的一种或多种。第二设备可以为包含无线收发功能、且可以与网络设备配合为用户提供通讯服务的设备。具体地,第二设备可以指UE、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理、用户装置或RSU。第二设备也可以是无人机、IoT设备、WLAN中的ST、蜂窝电话、智能电话、无绳电话、无线数据卡、平板型电脑、SIP电话、WLL站、PDA设备、膝上型电脑、MTC终端、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备(也可以称为穿戴式智能设备)、VR终端、AR终端、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、运输安全中的无线终端、智慧城市中的无线终端、智慧家庭中的无线终端等。第二设备还可以为5G系统中的终端,也可以为下一代通信系统中的终端,本申请实施例对此不作限定。可选的,第二设备可以称为锚点设备。The second device is an entity on the user side for receiving signals, or sending signals, or receiving signals and sending signals. The second device is used to provide one or more of voice services and data connectivity services to users. The second device can be a device that includes wireless transceiver functions and can cooperate with network equipment to provide communication services to users. Specifically, the second device can refer to UE, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, user device or RSU. The second device can also be a drone, IoT device, ST in WLAN, cellular phone, smart phone, cordless phone, wireless data card, tablet computer, SIP phone, WLL station, PDA device, laptop, MTC terminal, handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, vehicle-mounted device, wearable device (also called wearable smart device), VR terminal, AR terminal, wireless terminal in industrial control, wireless terminal in unmanned driving, wireless terminal in transportation safety, wireless terminal in smart city, wireless terminal in smart home, etc. The second device may also be a terminal in a 5G system or a terminal in a next generation communication system, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. Optionally, the second device may be referred to as an anchor device.
本申请的实施例对第二设备的设备形态不做限定,用于实现第二设备的功能的装置可以是第二设备;也可以是能够支持第二设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。该装置可以被安装在第二设备中或者和第二设备匹配使用。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。The embodiments of the present application do not limit the device form of the second device. The device for realizing the function of the second device may be the second device; or it may be a device that can support the second device to realize the function, such as a chip system. The device may be installed in the second device or used in combination with the second device. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices.
需要指出的是,本申请涉及的第二设备可以用于对终端设备进行定位测量。It should be pointed out that the second device involved in the present application can be used to perform positioning measurement on the terminal device.
三、终端设备3. Terminal Equipment
终端设备是用户侧的一种用于接收信号,或者,发送信号,或者,接收信号和发送信号的实体。终端设备可以用于向用户提供语音服务和数据连通性服务中的一种或多种。终端设备可以为包含无线收发功能、且可以与网络设备配合为用户提供通讯服务的设备。具体地,终端设备可以指UE、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理、用户装置或RSU。终端设备也可以是无人机、IoT设备、WLAN中的ST、蜂窝电话、智能电话、无绳电话、无线数据卡、平板型电脑、SIP电话、WLL站、PDA设备、膝上型电脑、MTC终端、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备(也可以称为穿戴式智能设备)、VR终端、AR终端、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、运输安全中的无线终端、智慧城市中的无线终端、智慧家庭中的无线终端等。终端设备还可以为5G系统中的终端,也可以为下一代通信系统中的终端,本申请实施例对此不作限定。The terminal device is an entity on the user side for receiving signals, or sending signals, or receiving and sending signals. The terminal device can be used to provide one or more of voice services and data connectivity services to users. The terminal device can be a device that includes wireless transceiver functions and can cooperate with network devices to provide communication services to users. Specifically, the terminal device can refer to UE, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, user device or RSU. The terminal device can also be a drone, IoT device, ST in WLAN, cellular phone, smart phone, cordless phone, wireless data card, tablet computer, SIP phone, WLL station, PDA device, laptop, MTC terminal, handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, vehicle-mounted device, wearable device (also called wearable smart device), VR terminal, AR terminal, wireless terminal in industrial control, wireless terminal in unmanned driving, wireless terminal in transportation safety, wireless terminal in smart city, wireless terminal in smart home, etc. The terminal device may also be a terminal in a 5G system or a terminal in a next-generation communication system, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
本申请的实施例对终端的设备形态不做限定,用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备;也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。该装置可以被安装在终端设备中或者和终端设备匹配使用。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。The embodiments of the present application do not limit the device form of the terminal. The device for realizing the function of the terminal device can be a terminal device; it can also be a device that can support the terminal device to realize the function, such as a chip system. The device can be installed in the terminal device or used in combination with the terminal device. In the embodiments of the present application, the chip system can be composed of chips, or it can include chips and other discrete devices.
四、网络设备4. Network equipment
网络设备为网络侧的一种用于发送信号,或者,接收信号,或者,发送信号和接收信号的实体。网络设备可以为部署在无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)中为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置,例 如可以为传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、基站、各种形式的控制节点。例如,网络控制器、无线控制器、云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器等。具体的,网络设备可以为各种形式的宏基站、微基站(也称为小站)、中继站、接入点(access point,AP)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved nodeB,或home node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseBand unit,BBU)、传输点(transmitting and receiving point,TRP)、发射点(transmitting point,TP)、移动交换中心、卫星或无人机等,也可以为基站的天线面板。控制节点可以连接多个基站,并为多个基站覆盖下的多个终端配置资源。在采用不同的无线接入技术的系统中,具备基站功能的设备的名称可能会有所不同。例如,可以是5G中的gNB,或者5G之后的网络中的网络侧设备或未来演进的公共陆地移动(通信)网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)网络中的网络设备,或者设备对设备(device-to-device,D2D)通信、机器对机器(machine-to-machine,M2M)通信、车联网通信中承担基站功能的设备等,本申请对网络设备的具体名称不作限定。网络设备还可以是开放式接入网(open RAN,O-RAN或ORAN)、云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)等。A network device is an entity on the network side that is used to send signals, or receive signals, or both send and receive signals. A network device can be a device deployed in a radio access network (RAN) to provide wireless communication functions for terminal devices, such as For example, it can be a transmission reception point (TRP), a base station, or various forms of control nodes. For example, a network controller, a wireless controller, or a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario. Specifically, the network device can be various forms of macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, access points (APs), radio network controllers (RNCs), node Bs (NBs), base station controllers (BSCs), base transceiver stations (BTSs), home base stations (e.g., home evolved node Bs, or home node Bs, HNBs), baseband units (BBUs), transmission points (TRPs), transmission points (TPs), mobile switching centers, satellites, or drones, or antenna panels of base stations. The control node can connect to multiple base stations and configure resources for multiple terminals covered by multiple base stations. In systems using different wireless access technologies, the names of devices with base station functions may be different. For example, it can be a gNB in 5G, or a network-side device in a network after 5G, or a network device in a future evolved public land mobile (communication) network (public land mobile network, PLMN) network, or a device that performs base station functions in device-to-device (D2D) communication, machine-to-machine (M2M) communication, and vehicle networking communication, etc. This application does not limit the specific name of the network device. The network device can also be an open access network (open RAN, O-RAN or ORAN), a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN), etc.
在一种可能的实施方式中,由多个网络设备协作协助终端实现无线接入,不同网络设备分别实现基站的部分功能。例如,网络设备可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),CU-控制面(control plane,CP),CU-用户面(user plane,UP),或者无线单元(radio unit,RU)等。CU和DU可以是单独设置,或者也可以包括在同一个网元中,例如BBU中。RU可以包括在射频设备或者射频单元中,例如包括在射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)、有源天线处理单元(active antenna unit,AAU)或远程射频头(remote radio head,RRH)中。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的设备。此外,CU可以划分为接入网RAN中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网CN中的网络设备,在此不做限制。In a possible implementation, multiple network devices collaborate to assist the terminal in achieving wireless access, and different network devices respectively implement part of the functions of the base station. For example, the network device may be a centralized unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), a CU-control plane (CP), a CU-user plane (UP), or a radio unit (RU). The CU and DU may be set separately, or may be included in the same network element, such as a BBU. The RU may be included in a radio frequency device or a radio frequency unit, such as a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH). It is understandable that the network device may be a CU node, a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node. In addition, the CU may be divided into a network device in the access network RAN, or the CU may be divided into a network device in the core network CN, without limitation here.
在不同系统中,CU(或CU-CP和CU-UP)、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,在ORAN系统中,CU也可以称为O-CU(开放式CU),DU也可以称为O-DU,CU-CP也可以称为O-CU-CP,CU-UP也可以称为O-CU-UP,RU也可以称为O-RU。为描述方便,本申请中以CU,CU-CP,CU-UP、DU和RU为例进行描述。本申请中的CU(或CU-CP、CU-UP)、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来实现。In different systems, CU (or CU-CP and CU-UP), DU or RU may also have different names, but those skilled in the art can understand their meanings. For example, in the ORAN system, CU may also be called O-CU (open CU), DU may also be called O-DU, CU-CP may also be called O-CU-CP, CU-UP may also be called O-CU-UP, and RU may also be called O-RU. For the convenience of description, CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU and RU are described as examples in this application. Any unit of CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU and RU in this application may be implemented by a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.
五、定位服务器5. Location Server
定位服务器用于提供根据定位精度要求、时延要求等选择相应的定位方法、以及选择相应的通信协议来完成定位所需信息的交互,以及用于为定位服务提供所需的其他信息,或者定位策略。在4G通信中,定位服务器可以是演进型服务移动位置中心(evolved serving mobile location center,E-SMLC)。在5G通信中,定位服务器可以是位置管理功能(location management function,LMF)网元,在未来通信如第6代(6th generation,6G)通信中,定位服务器仍可以是LMF网元,或者有其它名称,本申请对此不作限定。The positioning server is used to provide the interaction of the information required for positioning by selecting the corresponding positioning method according to the positioning accuracy requirements, delay requirements, etc., and selecting the corresponding communication protocol, and is used to provide other information required for positioning services, or positioning strategies. In 4G communications, the positioning server can be an evolved serving mobile location center (E-SMLC). In 5G communications, the positioning server can be a location management function (LMF) network element. In future communications such as the 6th generation (6G) communications, the positioning server can still be an LMF network element, or have other names, and this application does not limit this.
六、接入和移动性管理设备6. Access and mobility management equipment
接入和移动性管理设备主要用于移动网络中的终端设备的注册、移动性管理、跟踪区更新流程。接入和移动性管理设备终结了非接入层(non access stratum,NAS)消息、完成注册管理、连接管理以及可达性管理、分配跟踪区域列表(track area list,TA list)以及移动性管理等,并且透明路由会话管理(session management,SM)消息到会话管理网元。在5G通信中,接入和移动性管理设备可以是接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元,Namf是AMF网元提供的基于服务的接口,AMF网元可以通过Namf与其他的网络功能通信。在未来通信如第6代(6th generation,6G)通信中,接入和移动性管理设备仍可以是AMF网元,或者有其它名称,本申请对此不作限定。The access and mobility management device is mainly used for the registration, mobility management, and tracking area update process of terminal devices in the mobile network. The access and mobility management device terminates the non-access stratum (NAS) message, completes registration management, connection management, and reachability management, allocates the tracking area list (TA list) and mobility management, and transparently routes the session management (SM) message to the session management network element. In 5G communication, the access and mobility management device can be an access and mobility management function (AMF) network element. Namf is a service-based interface provided by the AMF network element. The AMF network element can communicate with other network functions through Namf. In future communications such as the 6th generation (6G) communication, the access and mobility management device can still be an AMF network element, or have other names, which is not limited in this application.
下面以5G通信系统为例,结合图2说明本申请实施例适用的一种具体可能的网络架构示意图。具体的,参见图2,图2为本申请实施例适用的一种具体可能的网络架构示意图。该网络结构可以包括上述LMF网元、AMF网元、gNB(或ng-eNB)、终端设备(如图2中的UE1)、第一设备(如图2中的UE2)和第二设备(如图2中的UE3)等。Taking the 5G communication system as an example, a specific possible network architecture diagram applicable to the embodiment of the present application is illustrated in combination with Figure 2. Specifically, refer to Figure 2, which is a specific possible network architecture diagram applicable to the embodiment of the present application. The network structure may include the above-mentioned LMF network element, AMF network element, gNB (or ng-eNB), terminal equipment (such as UE1 in Figure 2), a first device (such as UE2 in Figure 2) and a second device (such as UE3 in Figure 2), etc.
其中,gNB可以包括多个发送节点(transmit point,TP)。需要说明的,gNB还可以包括多个接收节点(reception point,RP)。也可以理解为gNB可以包括多个发送-接收节点(transmit and reception point,TRP)。另外,NL1接口为AMF网元与LMF网元之间的参考点,NG-C接口为gNB(或ng-eNB)与AMF网元之间的参考点,用于NAS消息和下一代应用协议(next generation application protocol,NGAP)消息的发送等。示例性的,AMF网元接收网络中的其它网元发起的关于某个UE(如UE1)的定位服务请求。 AMF网元将收到的请求发送给LMF网元,LMF网元负责处理收到的定位请求,并发起相关的定位流程。gNB和UE2、UE3等通过空中接口通信。其中,空中接口为一个名称,该空中接口可以为网络设备与终端设备之间的通信接口。比如,在4G中,空中接口称为Uu接口(即图2中LTE Uu接口);在5G中,空中接口称为新空口(new radio,NR)(即图2中NR Uu接口)。UE1和UE3通过PC5接口通信,UE2和UE3通过PC5接口通信。Among them, the gNB may include multiple transmission points (TP). It should be noted that the gNB may also include multiple reception points (RP). It can also be understood that the gNB may include multiple transmission and reception points (TRP). In addition, the NL1 interface is a reference point between the AMF network element and the LMF network element, and the NG-C interface is a reference point between the gNB (or ng-eNB) and the AMF network element, which is used for the transmission of NAS messages and next generation application protocol (NGAP) messages. Exemplarily, the AMF network element receives a positioning service request for a UE (such as UE1) initiated by other network elements in the network. The AMF network element sends the received request to the LMF network element, which is responsible for processing the received positioning request and initiating the relevant positioning process. gNB communicates with UE2, UE3, etc. through the air interface. The air interface is a name, and the air interface can be a communication interface between a network device and a terminal device. For example, in 4G, the air interface is called the Uu interface (i.e., the LTE Uu interface in Figure 2); in 5G, the air interface is called the new radio (NR) (i.e., the NR Uu interface in Figure 2). UE1 and UE3 communicate through the PC5 interface, and UE2 and UE3 communicate through the PC5 interface.
此外,AMF网元也可以采用服务化接口进行交互。比如,AMF网元对外提供的服务化接口可以为Namf。In addition, AMF network elements can also use service-oriented interfaces for interaction. For example, the service-oriented interface provided by AMF network elements to the outside world can be Namf.
需要说明的,在图2中,LMF网元的控制面和用户面分别是演进的服务移动位置中心(evolved□serving mobile location center,E□SMLC)和安全用户平面定位平台(SUPL location platform,SLP),这可以实现与gNB/ng-eNB、UE1、UE2和UE3进行各类信息的交互。It should be noted that in Figure 2, the control plane and user plane of the LMF network element are the evolved serving mobile location center (ESMLC) and the secure user plane positioning platform (SUPL location platform, SLP), which can realize the interaction of various types of information with gNB/ng-eNB, UE1, UE2 and UE3.
可以理解的是,图1和图2中所示的网元或者功能既可以是硬件设备中的网络元件,也可以是在专用硬件上运行软件功能,或者是平台(例如,云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能。一种可能的实现方式,上述网元或者功能可以由一个设备实现,也可以由多个设备共同实现,还可以是一个设备内的一个功能模块,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。另外,在下文中,为了方便描述,可以省略“网元”。例如,本申请实施例的LMF网元与LMF表达同一含义,只是为了方便描述,省略了网元这两个字,其余的类似。It is understandable that the network elements or functions shown in Figures 1 and 2 can be network elements in hardware devices, software functions running on dedicated hardware, or virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud platform). In one possible implementation, the above-mentioned network elements or functions can be implemented by one device, or by multiple devices together, or can be a functional module within a device, and the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this. In addition, in the following text, for the convenience of description, "network element" can be omitted. For example, the LMF network element in the embodiment of the present application expresses the same meaning as LMF, but for the convenience of description, the two words "network element" are omitted, and the rest are similar.
需要指出的是,图1和图2所示的通信系统并不构成本申请实施例能够适用的通信系统的限定。因此本申请实施例提供的通信方法还可以适用于各种制式的通信系统,例如:长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)通信系统、5G通信系统、6G通信系统以及未来通信系统、V2X、LTE-车联网(LTE-vehicle,LTE-V)、车到车(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)、车联网、机器类通信(machine type communications,MTC)、IoT、LTE-机器到机器(LTE-machine to machine,LTE-M)、M2M、物联网等。另外,还需要说明的是,本申请实施例也不对通信系统中各网元的名称进行限定,例如,在不同制式的通信系统中,各网元可以有其它名称;又例如,当多个网元融合在同一物理设备中时,该物理设备也可以有其他名称。It should be noted that the communication systems shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 do not constitute a limitation on the communication systems to which the embodiments of the present application can be applied. Therefore, the communication method provided in the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to communication systems of various standards, such as: long term evolution (LTE) communication system, 5G communication system, 6G communication system and future communication system, V2X, LTE-vehicle (LTE-V), vehicle to vehicle (V2V), vehicle networking, machine type communications (MTC), IoT, LTE-machine to machine (LTE-M), M2M, Internet of Things, etc. In addition, it should be noted that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the names of the network elements in the communication system. For example, in communication systems of different standards, each network element may have other names; for another example, when multiple network elements are integrated into the same physical device, the physical device may also have other names.
下面将结合图1和图2对本申请实施例提供的定位方法进行具体阐述。具体的,后文以网络设备、定位服务器和接入和移动性管理设备分别为图1和图2中的gNB、LMF和AMF为例进行说明。另外,为了便于描述,可以将图1和图2提到的终端设备、第一设备和第二设备分别称为目标(target)UE、附加锚点(additional anchor)UE和初始锚点(initialing anchor)UE。The positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below in conjunction with FIG. 1 and FIG. 2. Specifically, the following text takes the network device, the positioning server, and the access and mobility management device as the gNB, LMF, and AMF in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, respectively, as an example for explanation. In addition, for the convenience of description, the terminal device, the first device, and the second device mentioned in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 may be referred to as the target UE, the additional anchor UE, and the initialing anchor UE, respectively.
需要说明的是,本申请下述实施例中各个网元之间的消息名字或消息中各参数的名字等只是一个示例,具体实现中也可以是其他的名字,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It should be noted that the message names between network elements or the names of parameters in the messages in the following embodiments of the present application are merely examples, and other names may be used in specific implementations, and the embodiments of the present application do not impose any specific limitations on this.
如图3所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种定位方法,该定位方法包括但不限于如下步骤:As shown in FIG3 , a positioning method is provided in an embodiment of the present application, and the positioning method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
301、additional anchor UE获取第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识target UE,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址。301. Additional anchor UE obtains first identification information and/or third identification information, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE. No communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE. The third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located.
在一种可能的实施方式中,additional anchor UE可以接收来自initialing anchor UE的第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息。在另一种可能的实施方式中,additional anchor UE可以接收来自LMF的第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息。In one possible implementation, the additional anchor UE may receive the first identification information and/or the third identification information from the initialing anchor UE. In another possible implementation, the additional anchor UE may receive the first identification information and/or the third identification information from the LMF.
其中,第一标识信息可以是target UE的标识,如L1 ID、L2 ID或L3 ID。也可以称为源标识,如源L1 ID、源L2 ID或源L3 ID等。当第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE时,第三标识信息可以是initialing anchor UE的标识,如L1 ID、L2 ID或L3 ID等。也可以称为目的标识,如目的L1 ID、目的L2 ID或目的L3 ID等。当第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE所在的设备组时,第三标识信息可以是initialing anchor UE所在组的组标识。当第三标识信息用于标识广播地址时,第三标识信息可以是广播地址信息。The first identification information may be an identification of the target UE, such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID. It may also be called a source identification, such as source L1 ID, source L2 ID or source L3 ID. When the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the third identification information may be an identification of the initialing anchor UE, such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID. It may also be called a destination identification, such as destination L1 ID, destination L2 ID or destination L3 ID. When the third identification information is used to identify the device group to which the initialing anchor UE belongs, the third identification information may be a group identification of the group to which the initialing anchor UE belongs. When the third identification information is used to identify a broadcast address, the third identification information may be broadcast address information.
需要指出的是,当additional anchor UE获取到第一标识信息时,第一标识信息用于标识target UE,可以理解为第一标识信息用于正确接收来自target UE的信号和/或数据,如用于一个或多个additional anchor UE正确接收来自target UE的信号和/或数据。It should be pointed out that, when the additional anchor UE obtains the first identification information, the first identification information is used to identify the target UE, which can be understood as the first identification information being used to correctly receive signals and/or data from the target UE, such as being used for one or more additional anchor UEs to correctly receive signals and/or data from the target UE.
当additional anchor UE获取到第一标识信息和第三标识信息时,第一标识信息和第三标识信息组成的标识对用于正确接收来自target UE的信号和/或数据,如用于一个或多个additional anchor UE正确接收来自target UE的信号和/或数据。在一种可能的实施方式中,在第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE时,target UE的L1 ID、L2 ID和L3 ID中任意一个ID可以与initialing anchor UE的L1 ID、L2 ID和L3 ID中任意一个ID组成该标识对。此时,该标识对还用于标识initialing anchor UE与target UE之间的链路,如单播链路或单播连接等。在又一种可能的实施方式中,当第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE所在 的设备组时,target UE的L1 ID、L2 ID和L3 ID中任意一个ID可以与initialing anchor UE所在组的组标识组成该标识对。此时,该标识对还用于标识initialing anchor UE与target UE之间的链路,如组播链路或组播连接等。在另一种可能的实施方式中,当第三标识信息用于标识广播地址时,target UE的L1 ID、L2 ID和L3 ID中任意一个ID可以与广播地址信息组成该标识对。When the additional anchor UE obtains the first identification information and the third identification information, the identification pair composed of the first identification information and the third identification information is used to correctly receive the signal and/or data from the target UE, such as being used for one or more additional anchor UEs to correctly receive the signal and/or data from the target UE. In one possible implementation, when the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, any one of the L1 ID, L2 ID and L3 ID of the target UE can form the identification pair with any one of the L1 ID, L2 ID and L3 ID of the initialing anchor UE. At this time, the identification pair is also used to identify the link between the initialing anchor UE and the target UE, such as a unicast link or a unicast connection. In another possible implementation, when the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, When the target UE is in a device group, any one of the L1 ID, L2 ID and L3 ID of the target UE can form the identification pair with the group identifier of the group to which the initialing anchor UE belongs. At this time, the identification pair is also used to identify the link between the initialing anchor UE and the target UE, such as a multicast link or a multicast connection. In another possible implementation, when the third identification information is used to identify the broadcast address, any one of the L1 ID, L2 ID and L3 ID of the target UE can form the identification pair with the broadcast address information.
当additional anchor UE获取到第三标识信息时,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址,可以理解为第三标识信息用于正确接收来自target UE的信号和/或数据,如用于一个或多个additional anchor UE正确接收来自target UE的信号和/或数据。When the additional anchor UE obtains the third identification information, the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or the broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located. It can be understood that the third identification information is used to correctly receive the signal and/or data from the target UE, such as used for one or more additional anchor UEs to correctly receive the signal and/or data from the target UE.
需要指出的是,本申请涉及的通信链路可以指侧行链路、PC5链路或PC5连接。如,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路,可以理解为target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立侧行链路、PC5链路或PC5连接等。It should be noted that the communication link involved in this application may refer to a side link, a PC5 link or a PC5 connection. For example, if no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE, it can be understood that no side link, a PC5 link or a PC5 connection is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息可以用于additional anchor UE进行定位测量,如对终端设备进行定位测量。第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息还可以用于initialing anchor UE进行定位测量,如对终端设备进行定位测量。In a possible implementation, the first identification information and/or the third identification information may be used for additional anchor UE to perform positioning measurements, such as performing positioning measurements on a terminal device. The first identification information and/or the third identification information may also be used for initialing anchor UE to perform positioning measurements, such as performing positioning measurements on a terminal device.
302、additional anchor UE根据第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。302. The additional anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information and/or the third identification information.
相应的,target UE向additional anchor UE发送侧行定位参考信号。Correspondingly, the target UE sends a side positioning reference signal to the additional anchor UE.
其中,本申请涉及的侧行定位参考信号用于定位等,如PRS、DMRS或SLSS。PRS也可以称为SL-PRS。The side positioning reference signal involved in the present application is used for positioning, such as PRS, DMRS or SLSS. PRS can also be called SL-PRS.
可选的,该方法还包括:获取侧行定位参考信号对应的SCI。该SCI可以包括第二标识信息和/或第四标识信息。第二标识信息可以是target UE的标识。当第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE时,第四标识信息可以是initialing anchor UE的标识。当第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE所在的设备组时,第四标识信息可以是initialing anchor UE所在组的组标识。当第三标识信息用于标识广播地址时,第四标识信息可以是广播地址信息。Optionally, the method also includes: obtaining the SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal. The SCI may include second identification information and/or fourth identification information. The second identification information may be an identification of the target UE. When the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the fourth identification information may be an identification of the initialing anchor UE. When the third identification information is used to identify the device group to which the initialing anchor UE belongs, the fourth identification information may be a group identification of the group to which the initialing anchor UE belongs. When the third identification information is used to identify the broadcast address, the fourth identification information may be broadcast address information.
当additional anchor UE获取到第一标识信息时,当第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,additional anchor UE接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。When the additional anchor UE obtains the first identification information, when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, the additional anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
当additional anchor UE获取到第一标识信息和第三标识信息时,当第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同,且第四标识信息与第三标识信息相同时,additional anchor UE接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。When the additional anchor UE obtains the first identification information and the third identification information, when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, the additional anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
当additional anchor UE获取到第三标识信息时,当第四标识信息与第三标识信息相同时,additional anchor UE接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。When the additional anchor UE obtains the third identification information, when the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, the additional anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
303、additional anchor UE根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第一测量结果,如additional anchor UE根据侧行定位参考信号对target UE进行定位测量,以得到第一测量结果。303. The additional anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result. For example, the additional anchor UE performs positioning measurement on the target UE according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain the first measurement result.
其中,第一测量结果可以是以下至少一项:target UE到additional anchor UE的RTOA、TOA、AOA、RSRP、RSRPP、径到达时间、径到达角、参考信号多普勒分量、参考信号径多普勒分量、target UE速度等。Among them, the first measurement result can be at least one of the following: RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from target UE to additional anchor UE.
需要指出的是,本申请涉及的RTOA指接收端接收到参考信号所在子帧的起始点相对于RTOA参考时间的时间。ToA指接收端接收到参考信号所在子帧的起始点时间;AOA指相对于参考方向,参考信号的方位角和垂直角。RSRP指在参考信号配置的测量时间与测量带宽内,承载参考信号的资源单元上的接收信号功率的均值。RSRPP指在参考信号配置的测量时间与测量带宽内,承载参考信号的资源单元在传输信道的某条时延路径上的接收功率均值,其中,第一时延路径的RSRPP为第一检测到(即最先检测到)的传输路径上对应的接收功率均值。径到达时间指接收端接收到参考信号在传输信道的某条路径上对应的接收分量的时间。该时间可以是相对于参考信号所在子帧起始点的时间、相对ToA的时间或相对某条径到达时间的时间。径到达角指相对于参考方向,参考信号在某条传输径上的方位角和垂直角。参考信号多普勒分量指在给定参考信号到达时间与到达角度的情况下,接收端两次连续测量得到的参考信号的到达相位差。参考信号径多普勒分量指在给定参考信号传输径的到达时间与到达角度情况下,接收端两次连续测量得到的参考信号在该传输径上的到达相位差。target UE速度指接收端基于参考信号所测得的目标设备(如本申请的target UE)的速度,包括方向和大小信息。It should be pointed out that the RTOA involved in this application refers to the time when the receiving end receives the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located relative to the RTOA reference time. ToA refers to the time when the receiving end receives the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located; AOA refers to the azimuth and vertical angle of the reference signal relative to the reference direction. RSRP refers to the mean of the received signal power on the resource unit carrying the reference signal within the measurement time and measurement bandwidth configured by the reference signal. RSRPP refers to the mean of the received power of the resource unit carrying the reference signal on a certain delay path of the transmission channel within the measurement time and measurement bandwidth configured by the reference signal, wherein the RSRPP of the first delay path is the corresponding mean of the received power on the first detected (i.e., first detected) transmission path. Path arrival time refers to the time when the receiving end receives the corresponding received component of the reference signal on a certain path of the transmission channel. The time can be the time relative to the starting point of the subframe where the reference signal is located, the time relative to ToA, or the time relative to the arrival time of a certain path. Path arrival angle refers to the azimuth and vertical angle of the reference signal on a certain transmission path relative to the reference direction. The reference signal Doppler component refers to the arrival phase difference of the reference signal obtained by two consecutive measurements at the receiving end given the arrival time and arrival angle of the reference signal. The reference signal path Doppler component refers to the arrival phase difference of the reference signal on the transmission path obtained by two consecutive measurements at the receiving end given the arrival time and arrival angle of the reference signal transmission path. The target UE speed refers to the speed of the target device (such as the target UE in this application) measured by the receiving end based on the reference signal, including direction and size information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在步骤303之前,该方法还包括:additional anchor UE接收来自initialing anchor UE或LMF的第一测量请求(measurementrequest),第一测量请求用于指示第一定位类型,如target UE到additional anchor UE的RTOA、TOA、AOA、RSRP、RSRPP、径到达时间、径到达角、参考信号多普勒分量、参考信号径多普勒分量、target UE速度等中的一项或多项。应理解的,第一测量结果与第一定 位类型关联,如第一定位类型为target UE到additional anchor UE的RTOA,第一测量结果为RTOA。又如,第一定位类型包括AOA、RSRP、RSRPP和径到达时间,第一测量结果包括AOA、RSRP、RSRPP和径到达时间。In a possible implementation manner, before step 303, the method further includes: the additional anchor UE receives a first measurement request (measurement request) from the initialing anchor UE or the LMF, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type, such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the additional anchor UE. It should be understood that the first measurement result is consistent with the first positioning type. For example, if the first positioning type is RTOA from the target UE to the additional anchor UE, the first measurement result is RTOA. For another example, if the first positioning type includes AOA, RSRP, RSRPP and path arrival time, the first measurement result includes AOA, RSRP, RSRPP and path arrival time.
在上述实施方式中,减少了target UE的ProSe直接发现过程以及target UE与additional anchor UE建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低target UE进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低target UE与additional anchor UE建立通信连接所需的信令开销。同时,还可以减少定位时延。In the above implementation, the target UE's ProSe direct discovery process and the process of establishing a communication connection between the target UE and the additional anchor UE are reduced. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to establish a communication connection with the additional anchor UE. At the same time, the positioning delay can also be reduced.
在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:additional anchor UE向initialing anchor UE或LMF发送第一测量结果。具体的,在additional anchor UE获取到来自initialing anchor UE的第一测量请求的情况下,additional anchor UE向initialinganchor UE发送第一测量结果。在additional anchor UE获取到来自LMF的第一测量请求的情况下,additional anchor UE向LMF发送第一测量结果。这使得initialing anchor UE或LMF可以获取到第一测量结果,进而可以根据第一测量结果,确定target UE的位置信息。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the additional anchor UE sends a first measurement result to the initialing anchor UE or the LMF. Specifically, in the case where the additional anchor UE obtains the first measurement request from the initialing anchor UE, the additional anchor UE sends the first measurement result to the initialing anchor UE. In the case where the additional anchor UE obtains the first measurement request from the LMF, the additional anchor UE sends the first measurement result to the LMF. This allows the initialing anchor UE or the LMF to obtain the first measurement result, and then determine the location information of the target UE based on the first measurement result.
本申请还提供图4所示的实施例,图4所述实施例可以包括如下步骤:The present application also provides an embodiment shown in FIG4 , which may include the following steps:
401、target UE生成第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于additional anchor UE进行定位测量,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路。401. The target UE generates first identification information, and the first identification information is used for the additional anchor UE to perform positioning measurement. No communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE.
其中,关于第一标识信息可以参考图3步骤301的相关描述,在此不加赘述。Among them, regarding the first identification information, please refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here.
402、target UE向initialing anchor UE发送第一标识信息。402. The target UE sends the first identification information to the initialing anchor UE.
相应的,initialing anchor UE接收来自target UE的第一标识信息。Correspondingly, the initialing anchor UE receives the first identification information from the target UE.
可选的,在步骤402之前,该方法还包括:target UE确定initialing anchor UE。如target UE根据target UE与多个第二候选设备(记作第二候选anchor UE)之间的信道条件,将多个第二候选anchor UE中信道条件最优的第二候选anchor UE确定为initialing anchor UE。Optionally, before step 402, the method further includes: the target UE determines the initialing anchor UE. For example, the target UE determines a second candidate anchor UE with the best channel condition among the multiple second candidate anchor UEs as the initialing anchor UE based on the channel condition between the target UE and the multiple second candidate devices (referred to as second candidate anchor UEs).
本申请涉及的信道条件例如可以包括以下至少一项:RSRP、RSRQ、路径损失或路径类型。该路径类型包括LOS和/或NLOS。The channel conditions involved in the present application may include, for example, at least one of the following: RSRP, RSRQ, path loss, or path type. The path type includes LOS and/or NLOS.
示例性的,候选anchor UE1的SINR大于候选anchor UE2的SINR,候选anchor UE2的SINR大于候选anchor UE3的SINR。候选anchor UE1的路径损失小于候选anchor UE2的路径损失,候选anchor UE2的路径损失小于候选anchor UE3的路径损失。候选anchor UE1的路径类型为LOS,候选anchor UE2的路径类型为LOS,候选anchor UE3的路径类型为NLOS。这3个候选anchor UE中,候选anchor UE1的信道条件最优,因此,target UE将候选anchor UE1作为initialinganchor UE。Exemplarily, the SINR of candidate anchor UE1 is greater than the SINR of candidate anchor UE2, and the SINR of candidate anchor UE2 is greater than the SINR of candidate anchor UE3. The path loss of candidate anchor UE1 is less than the path loss of candidate anchor UE2, and the path loss of candidate anchor UE2 is less than the path loss of candidate anchor UE3. The path type of candidate anchor UE1 is LOS, the path type of candidate anchor UE2 is LOS, and the path type of candidate anchor UE3 is NLOS. Among the three candidate anchor UEs, the channel condition of candidate anchor UE1 is the best, so the target UE uses candidate anchor UE1 as the initialing anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一标识信息可以携带在直接链路建立请求(directlinkestablishmentrequest)消息中,该直接链路建立请求消息用于请求建立target UE与initialing anchor UE之间的侧行链路。本申请对target UE与initialinganchor UE建立侧行链路的过程,不做限定。In a possible implementation, the first identification information may be carried in a direct link establishment request (directlinkestablishmentrequest) message, where the direct link establishment request message is used to request establishment of a sidelink between the target UE and the initialing anchor UE. This application does not limit the process of establishing a sidelink between the target UE and the initialing anchor UE.
需要指出的是,步骤402例如可以是可选步骤。如additional anchor UE可以根据第三标识信息接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号,这种情况下,可以不执行步骤402。It should be noted that step 402 may be an optional step. For example, if the additional anchor UE may receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the third identification information, in this case, step 402 may not be performed.
其中,在步骤402之后,可以执行步骤403;或,执行步骤404至步骤406。为便于区分,在图4中,将步骤403作为一种实现方式,如方式1,将步骤404至步骤406作为另一种实现方式,如方式2。After step 402, step 403 may be performed; or steps 404 to 406 may be performed. For the sake of distinction, in FIG4 , step 403 is regarded as one implementation mode, such as mode 1, and steps 404 to 406 are regarded as another implementation mode, such as mode 2.
方式1、Method 1:
403、initialing anchor UE向additional anchor UE发送第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息。403. The initialing anchor UE sends the first identification information and/or the third identification information to the additional anchor UE.
相应的,additional anchor UE接收来自initialing anchor UE的第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息。Correspondingly, the additional anchor UE receives the first identification information and/or third identification information from the initialing anchor UE.
其中,关于第三标识信息可以参考图3步骤301的相关描述,在此不加赘述。Among them, the third identification information can refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here.
方式2、Method 2:
404、initialing anchor UE向target UE发送第三标识信息。404. The initialing anchor UE sends the third identification information to the target UE.
相应的,target UE接收来自initialing anchor UE的第三标识信息。Correspondingly, the target UE receives the third identification information from the initialing anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,第三标识信息可以携带在直接链路建立接受(directlinkestablishmentaccept)消息中,该直接链路建立接受用于指示target UE与initialing anchor UE之间的侧行链路已成功建立。In one possible implementation, the third identification information may be carried in a direct link establishment accept message, which is used to indicate that the sidelink between the target UE and the initializing anchor UE has been successfully established.
需要指出的是,步骤404是可选步骤。如additional anchor UE可以根据第一标识信息接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号,这种情况下,可以不执行步骤404。It should be noted that step 404 is an optional step. If the additional anchor UE can receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information, in this case, step 404 may not be performed.
405、target UE向LMF发送第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息。405. The target UE sends the first identification information and/or the third identification information to the LMF.
相应的,LMF接收来自target UE的第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息。Correspondingly, the LMF receives the first identification information and/or the third identification information from the target UE.
406、LMF向additional anchor UE发送第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息。 406. The LMF sends the first identification information and/or the third identification information to the additional anchor UE.
相应的,additional anchor UE接收来自LMF的第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息。Correspondingly, the additional anchor UE receives the first identification information and/or third identification information from the LMF.
在上述实施方式中,减少了target UE的ProSe直接发现过程以及target UE与additional anchor UE建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低target UE进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低target UE与additional anchor UE建立通信连接所需的信令开销。In the above implementation, the target UE's ProSe direct discovery process and the process of establishing a communication connection between the target UE and the additional anchor UE are reduced. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to establish a communication connection with the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:initialing anchor UE根据第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号;initialing anchor UE根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第二测量结果,如initialing anchor UE根据侧行定位参考信号对target UE进行定位测量,以得到第二测量结果。这表明initialing anchor UE可以根据侧行定位参考信号对target UE进行定位测量。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the initialing anchor UE receives a side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information and/or the third identification information; the initialing anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result, such as the initialing anchor UE performs positioning measurement on the target UE according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain the second measurement result. This indicates that the initialing anchor UE can perform positioning measurement on the target UE according to the side positioning reference signal.
其中,第二测量结果包括以下至少一项:target UE到initialing anchor UE的RTOA、TOA、AOA、RSRP、RSRPP、径到达时间、径到达角、参考信号多普勒分量、参考信号径多普勒分量、target UE速度等中的一项或多项。Among them, the second measurement result includes at least one of the following: one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the initialing anchor UE.
可选的,该方法还包括:initialing anchor UE获取侧行定位参考信号对应的SCI,该SCI与图3中步骤302的相关描述类似,在此不加赘述。Optionally, the method also includes: initialing anchor UE obtains SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal, and the SCI is similar to the relevant description of step 302 in Figure 3, which is not repeated here.
当initialing anchor UE获取到第一标识信息时,当第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,initialing anchor UE接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。When the initialing anchor UE obtains the first identification information, when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, the initialing anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
当initialing anchor UE获取到第一标识信息和第三标识信息时,当第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同,且第四标识信息与第三标识信息相同时,initialing anchor UE接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。When the initialing anchor UE obtains the first identification information and the third identification information, when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information, and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, the initialing anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
当initialing anchor UE获取到第三标识信息时,当第四标识信息与第三标识信息相同时,initialing anchor UE接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。When the initialing anchor UE obtains the third identification information, when the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information, the initialing anchor UE receives the side positioning reference signal from the target UE.
本申请还提供图5所示的实施例,图5所示的实施例可以包括如下步骤:The present application also provides an embodiment shown in FIG5 , which may include the following steps:
501、target UE生成第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定additional anchor UE,additional anchor UE用于对target UE进行定位测量,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路。501. The target UE generates first information, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE, and the additional anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE. No communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE.
其中,在步骤501之后,可以执行步骤502和步骤503;或,执行步骤504和步骤505。为便于区分,在图5中,将步骤502和步骤503作为一种实现方式,如方式A,将步骤504和步骤505作为另一种实现方式,如方式B。After step 501, step 502 and step 503 may be performed; or step 504 and step 505 may be performed. For the sake of distinction, in FIG5 , step 502 and step 503 are regarded as one implementation mode, such as mode A, and step 504 and step 505 are regarded as another implementation mode, such as mode B.
方式A、Method A
502、initialing anchor UE接收来自target UE的第一信息。502. The initialing anchor UE receives the first information from the target UE.
相应的,target UE向initialing anchor UE发送第一信息。此时,第一信息用于请求确定additional anchor UE,可以理解为第一信息用于请求initialing anchor UE确定参与定位target UE的additional anchor UE。Correspondingly, the target UE sends the first information to the initialing anchor UE. At this time, the first information is used to request the determination of the additional anchor UE, which can be understood as the first information is used to request the initialing anchor UE to determine the additional anchor UE that participates in positioning the target UE.
其中,第一信息可以携带在SCI、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)控制单元(control element,CE)或定位信息请求(locationinformationrequest)中。The first information may be carried in an SCI, a media access control (MAC) control element (CE) or a location information request (locationinformationrequest).
503、initialing anchor UE确定additional anchor UE。503. Initialing anchor UE determines additional anchor UE.
可选的,步骤503可以包括:initialing anchor UE根据initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选设备(记作第一候选anchor UE)之间的先验信息,从多个第一候选anchor UE中确定additional anchor UE,如至少一个additional anchor UE。可选的,这可以在步骤403之前执行。这样,可以加快initialing anchor UE确定additional anchor UE的速度,进而可以减少定位时延。Optionally, step 503 may include: the initialing anchor UE determines an additional anchor UE, such as at least one additional anchor UE, from multiple first candidate anchor UEs according to prior information between the initialing anchor UE and multiple first candidate devices (recorded as first candidate anchor UEs). Optionally, this may be performed before step 403. In this way, the speed at which the initialing anchor UE determines the additional anchor UE can be accelerated, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
其中,initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选anchor UE之间的先验信息可以是target UE在第一侧行链路上向initialing anchor UE发送的信息,如与步骤402中第一标识信息一起发送,又如单独发送;或,该先验信息可以是initialing anchor UE自行确定的,在此不做限定。可选的,该先验信息可以包括以下至少一项:多个第一候选anchor UE中各个第一候选anchor UE的位置、initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选anchor UE之间的通信连接关系、多个第一候选anchor UE中各个第一候选anchor UE对应的历史组播或单播上下文信息、initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选anchor UE之间的信道条件。The prior information between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs may be information sent by the target UE to the initialing anchor UE on the first sidelink, such as sent together with the first identification information in step 402, or sent separately; or, the prior information may be determined by the initialing anchor UE itself, which is not limited here. Optionally, the prior information may include at least one of the following: the position of each first candidate anchor UE among the multiple first candidate anchor UEs, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs, the historical multicast or unicast context information corresponding to each first candidate anchor UE among the multiple first candidate anchor UEs, and the channel condition between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs.
在一种可能的实施方式中,本申请涉及的第一候选anchor UE的位置可以包括以下至少一项:第一候选anchor UE的经纬度坐标或该经纬度坐标的经纬度坐标区间值。在又一种可能的实施方式中,本申请涉及的第一候选anchor UE的位置可以包括以下至少一项:第一候选anchor UE所在小区或第一候选anchor UE所在跟踪区等。在另一种可能的实施方式中,本申请涉及的第一候选anchor UE的位置可以是第一候选anchor UE的相对位置,如第一候选anchor UE相对于initialing anchor UE的方向和距离,或,第一候选anchor UE相对于某个基站(该基站可以覆盖initialing anchor UE,也可以不覆盖initialing anchor UE)的方向和距离。In one possible implementation, the position of the first candidate anchor UE involved in the present application may include at least one of the following: the longitude and latitude coordinates of the first candidate anchor UE or the longitude and latitude coordinate interval value of the longitude and latitude coordinates. In another possible implementation, the position of the first candidate anchor UE involved in the present application may include at least one of the following: the cell where the first candidate anchor UE is located or the tracking area where the first candidate anchor UE is located. In another possible implementation, the position of the first candidate anchor UE involved in the present application may be the relative position of the first candidate anchor UE, such as the direction and distance of the first candidate anchor UE relative to the initialing anchor UE, or the first candidate anchor UE. The direction and distance of the UE relative to a certain base station (the base station may or may not cover the initialing anchor UE).
在一种可能的实施方式中,initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选anchor UE中任意一个第一候选anchor UE之间的通信连接关系可以包括之前建立通信连接或未建立通信连接。在另一种可能的实施方式中,initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选anchor UE中任意一个第一候选anchor UE之间的通信连接关系可以包括已建立通信连接或未建立通信连接。当initialing anchor UE将某个第一候选anchor UE作为additional anchor UE,且initialing anchor UE与该第一候选anchor UE之间的通信连接关系为之前建立通信连接时,initialing anchor UE可以基于该第一候选anchor UE对应的历史单播上下文信息或历史组播上下文信息,与该第一候选anchor UE建立通信连接。当initialing anchor UE将某个第一候选anchor UE作为additional anchor UE,且initialing anchor UE与该第一候选anchor UE之间的通信连接关系为未建立通信连接时,initialing anchor UE可以与该第一候选anchor UE建立通信连接。In one possible implementation, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and any one of the multiple first candidate anchor UEs may include a previously established communication connection or no established communication connection. In another possible implementation, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and any one of the multiple first candidate anchor UEs may include an established communication connection or no established communication connection. When the initialing anchor UE uses a first candidate anchor UE as an additional anchor UE, and the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate anchor UE is a previously established communication connection, the initialing anchor UE may establish a communication connection with the first candidate anchor UE based on the historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate anchor UE. When the initialing anchor UE takes a first candidate anchor UE as an additional anchor UE, and the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate anchor UE is that the communication connection is not established, the initialing anchor UE can establish a communication connection with the first candidate anchor UE.
多个第一候选anchor UE中各个第一候选anchor UE对应的历史单播上下文信息可以包括以下至少一项:第一候选anchor UE的标识(如第一候选设备的L1 ID、L2 ID或L3 ID)、initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选anchor UE间的历史服务类型标识、initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选设备间的历史侧行链路对应的V2X服务质量特性标识等。多个第一候选anchor UE中各个第一候选anchor UE对应的历史组播上下文信息可以包括以下至少一项:第一候选anchor UE所在组的组标识、initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选anchor UE间的历史服务类型标识、initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选anchor UE间的历史侧行链路对应的V2X服务质量特性标识。The historical unicast context information corresponding to each first candidate anchor UE among the multiple first candidate anchor UEs may include at least one of the following: an identifier of the first candidate anchor UE (such as L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID of the first candidate device), a historical service type identifier between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs, a V2X service quality characteristic identifier corresponding to the historical sidelink between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate devices, etc. The historical multicast context information corresponding to each first candidate anchor UE among the multiple first candidate anchor UEs may include at least one of the following: a group identifier of the group to which the first candidate anchor UE belongs, a historical service type identifier between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs, and a V2X service quality characteristic identifier corresponding to the historical sidelink between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate anchor UEs.
需要指出的是,本申请涉及的历史服务类型标识可以用于标识PC5链路上的V2X服务类型,如定位服务信息或道路预警信息等。服务质量特性标识可以用于标识PC5链路的服务质量,如调度优先级等。It should be noted that the historical service type identifier involved in this application can be used to identify the V2X service type on the PC5 link, such as positioning service information or road warning information, etc. The service quality characteristic identifier can be used to identify the service quality of the PC5 link, such as scheduling priority, etc.
方式B、Method B
504、LMF接收来自target UE的第一信息。504. LMF receives the first information from the target UE.
相应的,target UE向LMF发送第一信息。此时,第一信息用于请求确定additional anchor UE,可以理解为第一信息用于请求LMF确定参与定位target UE的additional anchor UE。Correspondingly, the target UE sends the first information to the LMF. At this time, the first information is used to request the determination of the additional anchor UE, which can be understood as the first information is used to request the LMF to determine the additional anchor UE participating in the positioning of the target UE.
其中,第一信息可以携带在附加锚点UE请求(additional anchor UErequest)消息中。The first information may be carried in an additional anchor UE request (additional anchor UErequest) message.
505、LMF确定additional anchor UE。505. LMF determines the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,该方法还包括:LMF接收来自target UE的第三标识信息;LMF根据第三标识信息,确定initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选设备之间的先验信息;步骤505包括:LMF根据该先验信息,从多个第一候选设备中确定additional anchor UE,如至少一个additional anchor UE。这可以加快LMF确定additional anchor UE的速度,进而可以减少定位时延。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the LMF receives third identification information from the target UE; the LMF determines, based on the third identification information, prior information between the initialing anchor UE and a plurality of first candidate devices; step 505 includes: the LMF determines, based on the prior information, additional anchor UEs, such as at least one additional anchor UE, from the plurality of first candidate devices. This can speed up the speed at which the LMF determines the additional anchor UE, thereby reducing the positioning delay.
其中,关于第三标识信息可以参考图3步骤301相关描述,在此不加赘述。Among them, the third identification information can refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here.
可选的,LMF根据第三标识信息,确定initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选设备之间的先验信息,可以包括:LMF获取第三标识信息和该先验信息之间的对应关系;LMF根据第三标识信息和该对应关系,确定该先验信息。Optionally, LMF determines the prior information between the initialing anchor UE and multiple first candidate devices based on the third identification information, which may include: LMF obtains the correspondence between the third identification information and the prior information; LMF determines the prior information based on the third identification information and the correspondence.
需要指出的是,步骤505提到的先验信息与步骤503涉及的先验信息类似,在此不加赘述。It should be noted that the prior information mentioned in step 505 is similar to the prior information involved in step 503 and is not described in detail here.
上述实施方式中,initialing anchor UE或LMF在获取第一信息后,可以确定参与定位target UE的additional anchor UE,这表明target UE无需进行ProSe直接发现,降低了target UE进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也减少了定位时延。In the above implementation, after obtaining the first information, the initialing anchor UE or LMF can determine the additional anchor UEs participating in positioning the target UE, which indicates that the target UE does not need to perform ProSe direct discovery, thereby reducing the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery and also reducing the positioning delay.
在一种可能的实施方式中,图3至图5所示的实施例可以分别作为一个独立的实施例。或,图3中的一个或多个步骤与图4中的一个或多个步骤可以组合成新的实施例,如,在步骤301中,当additional anchor UE通过initialing anchor UE获取第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息时,图4中的步骤403是图3中的步骤301的具体实现,此时,图4中的步骤401和步骤402可以在步骤301之前执行。又如,当additional anchor UE通过LMF获取第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息时,图4中的步骤406是图3中的步骤301的具体实现,此时,图4中的步骤401、步骤404至步骤405可以在步骤301之前执行。In a possible implementation, the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 5 can be respectively used as an independent embodiment. Or, one or more steps in FIG. 3 and one or more steps in FIG. 4 can be combined into a new embodiment. For example, in step 301, when the additional anchor UE obtains the first identification information and/or the third identification information through the initialing anchor UE, step 403 in FIG. 4 is a specific implementation of step 301 in FIG. 3. At this time, step 401 and step 402 in FIG. 4 can be executed before step 301. For another example, when the additional anchor UE obtains the first identification information and/or the third identification information through the LMF, step 406 in FIG. 4 is a specific implementation of step 301 in FIG. 3. At this time, step 401, step 404 to step 405 in FIG. 4 can be executed before step 301.
进一步的,在图3中的一个或多个步骤与图4中的一个或多个步骤组合成新的实施例的基础上,图5中的一个或多个步骤还可以与该新的实施例进行结合。如在步骤403之前,可以执行步骤501至步骤503。又如,在步骤406之前,可以执行步骤501、步骤504和步骤505。Further, on the basis of combining one or more steps in FIG. 3 with one or more steps in FIG. 4 to form a new embodiment, one or more steps in FIG. 5 may also be combined with the new embodiment. For example, before step 403, steps 501 to 503 may be performed. For another example, before step 406, steps 501, 504, and 505 may be performed.
可选的,步骤402中的第一标识信息和步骤502中的第一信息可以携带在同一消息或不同消息中。同理,步骤405发送的标识信息(如第一标识信息和/或第三标识信息)和步骤504中的第一信息可以携带在 同一消息或不同消息中。Optionally, the first identification information in step 402 and the first information in step 502 may be carried in the same message or in different messages. Similarly, the identification information (such as the first identification information and/or the third identification information) sent in step 405 and the first information in step 504 may be carried in in the same message or in different messages.
以上实施例中包含了很多可能的实现方案,下面以additional anchor UE或initialing anchor UE根据第一标识信息,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号为例,结合图6至图8对其中的部分实现方案进行举例说明。需要说明的是,图6至图8未解释到的相关概念或者操作或者逻辑关系可以参照图3至图5所示实施例中的相应描述,因此不再赘述。The above embodiments include many possible implementation schemes. Taking the additional anchor UE or initialing anchor UE receiving the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information as an example, some of the implementation schemes are illustrated in conjunction with Figures 6 to 8. It should be noted that the related concepts, operations or logical relationships not explained in Figures 6 to 8 can refer to the corresponding descriptions in the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 5, and therefore will not be repeated.
参见图6,图6为本申请实施例提供的一种网络覆盖下的定位方法的流程示意图。如图6所示,该方法包括但不限于如下步骤:See Figure 6, which is a flow chart of a positioning method under network coverage provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 6, the method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
601、LMF向target UE发送定位请求(positionrequest),该定位请求用于请求对targetUE进行定位测量。601. LMF sends a positioning request (position request) to the target UE, where the positioning request is used to request positioning measurement of the target UE.
相应的,target UE接收来自LMF的定位请求。Correspondingly, the target UE receives a positioning request from the LMF.
在一种可能的实施方式中,LMF可以向AMF发送该定位请求,AMF向gNB发送定位请求,gNB向target UE发送定位请求。In a possible implementation, the LMF may send the positioning request to the AMF, the AMF sends the positioning request to the gNB, and the gNB sends the positioning request to the target UE.
其中,在步骤601之前,LMF还可以获取target UE的定位能力(如target UE对参考信号的处理能力等)等,具体过程,在此不做限定。Among them, before step 601, LMF can also obtain the positioning capability of the target UE (such as the target UE's processing capability of the reference signal, etc.), etc. The specific process is not limited here.
602、target UE确定initialing anchor UE。602. The target UE determines the initialing anchor UE.
其中,步骤602可以参考图4中步骤402的相关描述,在此不加赘述。Among them, step 602 can refer to the relevant description of step 402 in Figure 4, and will not be repeated here.
603、target UE生成第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定additional anchor UE。603. The target UE generates first information, and the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE.
其中,步骤603与图5中步骤501类似,在此不加赘述。Among them, step 603 is similar to step 501 in Figure 5 and is not described again here.
604、target UE向initialing anchor UE发送第一信息。604. The target UE sends the first information to the initialing anchor UE.
相应的,initialing anchor UE接收来自target UE的第一信息,第一信息可以携带在SCI或MAC CE中。Correspondingly, the initialing anchor UE receives the first information from the target UE, and the first information can be carried in the SCI or MAC CE.
605、initialing anchor UE确定additional anchor UE。605. Initialing anchor UE determines additional anchor UE.
其中,步骤605与图5中步骤503类似,在此不加赘述。Among them, step 605 is similar to step 503 in Figure 5 and is not described again here.
可选的,该方法还包括:initialing anchor UE向target UE发送第二信息,第二信息用于通知target UE已完成additional anchor UE的确定。第二信息可以携带在SCI或MAC CE中。Optionally, the method further includes: the initialing anchor UE sends second information to the target UE, where the second information is used to notify the target UE that the determination of the additional anchor UE has been completed. The second information can be carried in the SCI or the MAC CE.
606、target UE生成第一标识信息。606. The target UE generates first identification information.
其中,步骤606与图4中步骤401类似,在此不加赘述。Among them, step 606 is similar to step 401 in Figure 4 and is not described again here.
607、target UE向initialing anchor UE发送第一标识信息。607. The target UE sends the first identification information to the initialing anchor UE.
相应的,initialing anchor UE接收来自target UE的第一标识信息。Correspondingly, the initialing anchor UE receives the first identification information from the target UE.
608、additional anchor UE接收来自initialing anchor UE的第一标识信息。608. Additional anchor UE receives the first identification information from initialing anchor UE.
相应的,initialing anchor UE向additional anchor UE发送第一标识信息。Correspondingly, the initialing anchor UE sends the first identification information to the additional anchor UE.
609、LMF获取第三标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识。其中,第三标识信息可以参考图3步骤301的相关描述,在此不加赘述。609. LMF obtains the third identification information and the identification of the additional anchor UE. The third identification information can refer to the relevant description of step 301 in FIG. 3, which is not repeated here.
在一种可能的实施方式中,LMF接收来自initialing anchor UE的第一标识信息、第三标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识。In one possible implementation, the LMF receives first identification information, third identification information and identification of additional anchor UEs from an initialing anchor UE.
需要指出的是,对于initialing anchor UE来说,可以从additional anchor UE获取additional anchor UE的标识,如additional anchor UE的L1 ID、L2 ID或L3 ID。It should be pointed out that, for the initialing anchor UE, the identification of the additional anchor UE, such as the L1 ID, L2 ID or L3 ID of the additional anchor UE, can be obtained from the additional anchor UE.
在又一种可能的实施方式中,LMF接收来自initialing anchor UE的第一标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识。可选的,LMF接收来自initialing anchor UE的第一标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识之前,该方法还包括:LMF接收来自target UE的第三标识信息;LMF根据第三标识信息,向initialing anchor UE发送第一请求消息,第一请求消息用于请求additional anchor UE的标识。在这种情况下,第一标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识可以携带在第一请求消息的响应消息中。可选的,在LMF接收来自target UE的第三标识信息之前,该方法还包括:LMF向target UE发送第二请求消息,第二请求消息用于请求第三标识信息。在这种情况下,第三标识信息例如可以携带在第二请求消息的响应消息中。In another possible implementation, the LMF receives first identification information and an identification of an additional anchor UE from an initialing anchor UE. Optionally, before the LMF receives the first identification information and an identification of an additional anchor UE from the initialing anchor UE, the method further includes: the LMF receives third identification information from the target UE; and the LMF sends a first request message to the initialing anchor UE based on the third identification information, and the first request message is used to request the identification of the additional anchor UE. In this case, the first identification information and the identification of the additional anchor UE may be carried in a response message to the first request message. Optionally, before the LMF receives the third identification information from the target UE, the method further includes: the LMF sends a second request message to the target UE, and the second request message is used to request the third identification information. In this case, the third identification information may be carried in a response message to the second request message, for example.
在另一种可能的实施方式中,LMF接收来自target UE的第三标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识。可选的,在LMF接收来自target UE的第三标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识之前,该方法还包括:LMF向target UE发送第三请求消息,第三请求消息用于请求第三标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识。在这种情况下,第三标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识例如可以携带在第三请求消息的响应消息中。需要指出的是,对于target UE来说,可以从initialing anchor UE获取additional anchor UE的标识。 In another possible implementation, the LMF receives third identification information and an identification of an additional anchor UE from the target UE. Optionally, before the LMF receives the third identification information and an identification of an additional anchor UE from the target UE, the method further includes: the LMF sends a third request message to the target UE, and the third request message is used to request the third identification information and the identification of the additional anchor UE. In this case, the third identification information and the identification of the additional anchor UE may be carried in a response message of the third request message, for example. It should be noted that, for the target UE, the identification of the additional anchor UE may be obtained from the initialing anchor UE.
其中,步骤609中涉及的第一请求消息、第二请求消息和第三请求消息可以称为锚点UE请求(anchor UErequest)消息。第一请求消息的响应消息、第二请求消息的响应消息和第三请求消息的响应消息可以称为锚点UE响应(anchor UEresponse)消息。The first request message, the second request message, and the third request message involved in step 609 may be referred to as anchor UE request messages. The response message of the first request message, the response message of the second request message, and the response message of the third request message may be referred to as anchor UE response messages.
610、LMF根据第三标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识,分别向initialing anchor UE和additional anchor UE发送第二测量请求和第一测量请求。610. LMF sends a second measurement request and a first measurement request to the initialing anchor UE and the additional anchor UE respectively according to the third identification information and the identification of the additional anchor UE.
相应的,initialing anchor UE接收来自LMF的第二测量请求,additional anchor UE接收来自LMF的第一测量请求。Correspondingly, the initialing anchor UE receives the second measurement request from the LMF, and the additional anchor UE receives the first measurement request from the LMF.
其中,第二测量请求用于指示第二定位类型,如target UE到initialing anchor UE的RTOA、TOA、AOA、RSRP、RSRPP、径到达时间、径到达角、参考信号多普勒分量、参考信号径多普勒分量、target UE速度等中的一项或多项。第一测量请求用于指示第一定位类型,如target UE到additional anchor UE的RTOA、TOA、AOA、RSRP、RSRPP、径到达时间、径到达角、参考信号多普勒分量、参考信号径多普勒分量、target UE速度等中的一项或多项。The second measurement request is used to indicate the second positioning type, such as one or more of the RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the initialing anchor UE. The first measurement request is used to indicate the first positioning type, such as one or more of the RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, reference signal Doppler component, reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the additional anchor UE.
需要指出的是,在步骤609中,LMF可以同时发送第二测量请求和第一测量请求,或,先发送第二测量请求,再发送第一测量请求,或,先发送第一测量请求,再发送第二测量请求,在此不做限定。It should be noted that in step 609, LMF can send the second measurement request and the first measurement request at the same time, or send the second measurement request first and then send the first measurement request, or send the first measurement request first and then send the second measurement request, which is not limited here.
611、target UE向gNB发送资源请求消息,该资源请求消息用于请求侧行定位参考信号的第一资源配置。611. The target UE sends a resource request message to the gNB, where the resource request message is used to request the first resource configuration of the sidelink positioning reference signal.
相应的,gNB接收来自target UE的资源请求消息。可选的,该资源请求消息可以称为SL-PRS资源请求(SL-PRS resourcerequest)消息。Accordingly, the gNB receives a resource request message from the target UE. Optionally, the resource request message may be referred to as a SL-PRS resource request (SL-PRS resource request) message.
其中,关于侧行定位参考信号可以参考图3步骤302相关描述,在此不加赘述。Among them, regarding the side positioning reference signal, please refer to the relevant description of step 302 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here.
其中,该第一资源配置包括以下至少一项:时域资源的配置(包括周期资源的周期和周期内的时隙级别偏移、时隙内的符号索引等)、频域资源的配置(包括带宽、起始资源块(resource block,RB)、跳频配置、频域梳齿配置)或侧行定位参考信号的图样(pattern)等,在此不做限定。侧行定位参考信号的图样可以指侧行定位参考信号在一个时隙上一个RB内的一个或多个资源单元(resource element,RE)、侧行定位参考信号资源的时域长度和频域长度等。The first resource configuration includes at least one of the following: configuration of time domain resources (including the period of periodic resources and the time slot level offset within the period, the symbol index within the time slot, etc.), configuration of frequency domain resources (including bandwidth, starting resource block (RB), frequency hopping configuration, frequency domain comb configuration) or the pattern of the side positioning reference signal, etc., which are not limited here. The pattern of the side positioning reference signal may refer to one or more resource elements (RE) within an RB of the side positioning reference signal in a time slot, the time domain length and frequency domain length of the side positioning reference signal resource, etc.
612、gNB向target UE发送资源请求消息的响应消息,资源请求消息的响应消息包括该资源配置。612. The gNB sends a response message to the resource request message to the target UE, where the response message to the resource request message includes the resource configuration.
相应的,target UE接收来自gNB的资源请求消息的响应消息。可选的,该资源请求消息的响应消息可以称为SL-PRS资源响应(SL-PRS resourceresponse)消息。Accordingly, the target UE receives a response message to the resource request message from the gNB. Optionally, the response message to the resource request message may be referred to as an SL-PRS resource response (SL-PRS resourceresponse) message.
可选的,该方法还包括:target UE广播第一资源配置。Optionally, the method also includes: the target UE broadcasts the first resource configuration.
需要说明的,本申请实施例中的步骤611至步骤612与步骤602至步骤610之间没有必然的执行先后顺序。步骤611至步骤612可以在步骤602至步骤610中的任意一个步骤之前或之后执行,或者,与步骤602至步骤610中的任意一个步骤同时执行。It should be noted that there is no necessary execution order between steps 611 to 612 and steps 602 to 610 in the embodiment of the present application. Steps 611 to 612 can be executed before or after any one of steps 602 to 610, or can be executed simultaneously with any one of steps 602 to 610.
613、target UE根据第一资源配置发送侧行定位参考信号。613. The target UE sends a side positioning reference signal according to the first resource configuration.
相应的,additional anchor UE和initialing anchor UE根据第一标识信息,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。Correspondingly, the additional anchor UE and the initialing anchor UE receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information.
可选的,target UE还可以根据第一资源配置发送SCI,该SCI包括第二标识信息,关于第二标识信息可以参考图3步骤301相关描述,在此不加赘述。如initialing anchor UE检测到该SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,initialing anchor UE来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。同理,additional anchor UE检测到该SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,additional anchor UE来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。Optionally, the target UE may also send an SCI according to the first resource configuration, and the SCI includes second identification information. For the second identification information, please refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here. If the initialing anchor UE detects that the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, the initialing anchor UE comes from the side positioning reference signal of the target UE. Similarly, when the additional anchor UE detects that the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, the additional anchor UE comes from the side positioning reference signal of the target UE.
614、additional anchor UE根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第一测量结果。614. The additional anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result.
其中,步骤614与图3中步骤303类似,在此不加赘述。Among them, step 614 is similar to step 303 in Figure 3 and is not described again here.
615、initialing anchor UE根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第二测量结果。615. The initialing anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result.
其中,关于第二测量结果可以参考图4相关描述,在此不加赘述。应理解的,第二测量结果与第二定位类型关联,如第二定位类型为target UE到initialing anchor UE的RTOA,第二测量结果为RTOA。又如,第二定位类型包括AOA、RSRP、RSRPP和径到达时间,第二测量结果包括AOA、RSRP、RSRPP和径到达时间。Among them, the second measurement result can refer to the relevant description of Figure 4, which is not repeated here. It should be understood that the second measurement result is associated with the second positioning type. For example, if the second positioning type is RTOA from the target UE to the initialing anchor UE, the second measurement result is RTOA. For another example, the second positioning type includes AOA, RSRP, RSRPP and path arrival time, and the second measurement result includes AOA, RSRP, RSRPP and path arrival time.
需要说明的,本申请实施例中的步骤614和步骤615之间没有必然的执行先后顺序。步骤614可以在步骤615之前或之后执行,或者,与步骤615同时执行。It should be noted that there is no necessary execution order between step 614 and step 615 in the embodiment of the present application. Step 614 can be executed before or after step 615, or simultaneously with step 615.
616、LMF接收来自additional anchor UE的第一测量结果。 616. The LMF receives a first measurement result from the additional anchor UE.
相应的,additional anchor UE向LMF发送第一测量结果。Correspondingly, the additional anchor UE sends the first measurement result to the LMF.
其中,第一测量结果例如可以携带在第一测量请求的响应消息中,第一测量请求的响应消息可以称为测量响应(measurementresponse)消息或测量报告(measurementreport)。The first measurement result may be carried in a response message of the first measurement request, for example. The response message of the first measurement request may be referred to as a measurement response (measurement response) message or a measurement report (measurement report).
617、LMF接收来自initialing anchor UE的第二测量结果。617. LMF receives the second measurement result from the initialing anchor UE.
相应的,initialing anchor UE向LMF发送第二测量结果。Correspondingly, the initialing anchor UE sends the second measurement result to the LMF.
其中,第二测量结果例如可以携带在第二测量请求的响应消息中,第二测量请求的响应消息可以称为measurementresponse消息或measurementreport。The second measurement result may be carried in a response message of the second measurement request, for example. The response message of the second measurement request may be called a measurementresponse message or a measurementreport.
需要说明的,本申请实施例中的步骤616和步骤617之间没有必然的执行先后顺序。步骤616可以在步骤617之前或之后执行,或者,与步骤617同时执行。It should be noted that there is no necessary execution order between step 616 and step 617 in the embodiment of the present application. Step 616 can be executed before or after step 617, or simultaneously with step 617.
618、LMF根据第一测量结果和第二测量结果,确定target UE的位置信息。618. LMF determines the location information of the target UE based on the first measurement result and the second measurement result.
在一种可能的实施方式中,target UE的位置信息可以为在某个位置系统(例如,全球定位系统(global positioning system,GPS)或北斗卫星系统)中的地理位置坐标。In one possible implementation, the location information of the target UE may be geographic location coordinates in a certain location system (e.g., the global positioning system (GPS) or the Beidou satellite system).
在上述实施例中,在网络覆盖场景下,由initialing anchor UE确定additional anchor UE,减少了target UE的ProSe直接发现过程以及target UE与additional anchor UE建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低target UE进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低target UE与additional anchor UE建立通信连接所需的信令开销,还可以减少定位时延。In the above embodiment, in the network coverage scenario, the initialing anchor UE determines the additional anchor UE, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the target UE and the process of establishing a communication connection between the target UE and the additional anchor UE. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to establish a communication connection with the additional anchor UE, and also reduce the positioning delay.
参见图7,图7为本申请实施例提供的一种无网络覆盖下的定位方法的流程示意图。如图7所示,该方法包括但不限于如下步骤:See Figure 7, which is a flow chart of a positioning method without network coverage provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 7, the method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
其中,图7中步骤702至步骤708,分别与图6中步骤602至步骤608类似,区别在于:Among them, steps 702 to 708 in FIG. 7 are similar to steps 602 to 608 in FIG. 6 , respectively, except that:
701、target UE被预配置了侧行定位参考信号的第二资源配置。701. The target UE is pre-configured with the second resource configuration of the side positioning reference signal.
其中,第二资源配置可以包括侧行定位参考信号的图样。关于侧行定位参考信号的图样可以参考图6步骤611相关描述,在此不加赘述。The second resource configuration may include a pattern of a sideline positioning reference signal. For the pattern of the sideline positioning reference signal, reference may be made to the related description of step 611 in FIG6 , which will not be described in detail here.
可选的,target UE周围的UE也可以被预配置第二资源配置。target UE周围的UE可以理解为可参与定位target UE的一个或多个UE。Optionally, UEs around the target UE may also be pre-configured with a second resource configuration. The UEs around the target UE may be understood as one or more UEs that may participate in locating the target UE.
709、initialing anchor UE向additional anchor UE发送第一测量请求。709. The initialing anchor UE sends a first measurement request to the additional anchor UE.
相应的,additional anchor UE接收来自initialing anchor UE的第一测量请求。Correspondingly, the additional anchor UE receives the first measurement request from the initialing anchor UE.
第一测量请求用于指示第一定位类型,如target UE到additional anchor UE的RTOA、TOA、AOA、RSRP、RSRPP、径到达时间、径到达角、侧行定位参考信号多普勒分量、侧行定位参考信号径多普勒分量、target UE速度等中的一项或多项。The first measurement request is used to indicate the first positioning type, such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, side positioning reference signal Doppler component, side positioning reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the additional anchor UE.
可选的,步骤708中的第一标识信息和步骤709中的第一测量请求可以携带在同一消息中,也可以携带在不同消息中,在此不做限定。Optionally, the first identification information in step 708 and the first measurement request in step 709 may be carried in the same message or in different messages, which is not limited here.
710、target UE根据第二资源配置发送侧行定位参考信号。710. The target UE sends a side positioning reference signal according to the second resource configuration.
相应的,additional anchor UE和initialing anchor UE根据第一标识信息,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。Correspondingly, the additional anchor UE and the initialing anchor UE receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information.
可选的,target UE还可以根据第二资源配置发送SCI,该SCI包括第二标识信息,关于第二标识信息可以参考图3步骤301相关描述,在此不加赘述。如initialing anchor UE检测到该SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,initialing anchor UE来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。同理,additional anchor UE检测到该SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,additional anchor UE来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。Optionally, the target UE may also send an SCI according to the second resource configuration, and the SCI includes second identification information. For the second identification information, please refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here. If the initialing anchor UE detects that the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, the initialing anchor UE comes from the side positioning reference signal of the target UE. Similarly, when the additional anchor UE detects that the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information, the additional anchor UE comes from the side positioning reference signal of the target UE.
可选的,在步骤710之前,该方法还可以包括:target UE根据侧行链路资源感知结果,确定侧行链路资源;步骤710可以包括:target UE根据第二资源配置和侧行链路资源,在第一侧行链路上发送侧行定位参考信号。具体的,target UE可以通过感知某一SCI获取其它UE预约的资源,并根据其它UE预约的资源,确定资源集合,如target UE针对其它UE预约的资源,测量信道信号的RSRP,从其它UE预约的资源中排除RSRP能量较高的资源,以得到资源集合。反之,某个RSRP测量结果小于或等于某个阈值,target UE可以认为信道未被占有,对应资源可用。这样targetUE可以确定可用的一个或多个资源。进一步的,target UE可以从资源集合中选择侧行链路资源,如target UE从资源集合中选择任意一个资源,作为侧行链路资源。Optionally, before step 710, the method may further include: the target UE determines the sidelink resource according to the sidelink resource perception result; step 710 may include: the target UE sends a sidelink positioning reference signal on the first sidelink according to the second resource configuration and the sidelink resource. Specifically, the target UE may obtain the resources reserved by other UEs by sensing a certain SCI, and determine a resource set based on the resources reserved by other UEs, such as the target UE measures the RSRP of the channel signal for the resources reserved by other UEs, and excludes resources with higher RSRP energy from the resources reserved by other UEs to obtain a resource set. Conversely, if a certain RSRP measurement result is less than or equal to a certain threshold, the target UE may consider that the channel is not occupied and the corresponding resource is available. In this way, the target UE can determine one or more available resources. Further, the target UE can select a sidelink resource from the resource set, such as the target UE selects any one resource from the resource set as the sidelink resource.
711、additional anchor UE根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第一测量结果。 711. The additional anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the sidetrack positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result.
其中,步骤711与图6中步骤614类似,在此不加赘述。Among them, step 711 is similar to step 614 in Figure 6 and is not described again here.
712、initialing anchor UE接收来自additional anchor UE的第一测量结果。712. The initialing anchor UE receives the first measurement result from the additional anchor UE.
相应的,additional anchor UE向initialing anchor UE发送第一测量结果。Correspondingly, the additional anchor UE sends the first measurement result to the initialing anchor UE.
713、initialing anchor UE根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第二测量结果。713. The initialing anchor UE performs positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result.
其中,步骤713与图6中步骤615类似,在此不加赘述。Among them, step 713 is similar to step 615 in Figure 6 and is not described again here.
需要说明的,步骤713与步骤711至步骤712之间没有必然的执行先后顺序。如步骤713可以在步骤711和步骤712中任意一个步骤之前或之后执行,或者,与步骤711和步骤712中任意一个步骤同时执行。It should be noted that there is no necessary execution order between step 713 and step 711 to step 712. For example, step 713 can be executed before or after any one of step 711 and step 712, or can be executed simultaneously with any one of step 711 and step 712.
714、initialing anchor UE根据第一测量结果和第二测量结果,确定target UE的位置信息。714. The initialing anchor UE determines the location information of the target UE based on the first measurement result and the second measurement result.
在一种可能的实施方式中,target UE的位置信息可以为在某个位置系统(例如,GPS或北斗卫星系统)中的地理位置坐标。In one possible implementation, the location information of the target UE may be the geographic location coordinates in a certain location system (e.g., GPS or Beidou satellite system).
715、target UE接收来自initialing anchor UE的target UE的位置信息。715. The target UE receives the location information of the target UE from the initialing anchor UE.
相应的,initialing anchor UE向target UE发送target UE的位置信息。Correspondingly, the initialing anchor UE sends the location information of the target UE to the target UE.
其中,target UE的位置信息可以携带在定位信息响应(locationinformationresponse)消息中。Among them, the location information of the target UE can be carried in the positioning information response (locationinformationresponse) message.
需要指出的是,步骤704涉及的第一信息可以携带在locationinformationrequest中。该locationinformationrequest可以用于指示第二定位类型,如target UE到initialing anchor UE的RTOA、TOA、AOA、RSRP、RSRPP、径到达时间、径到达角、侧行定位参考信号多普勒分量、侧行定位参考信号径多普勒分量、target UE速度等中的一项或多项。It should be noted that the first information involved in step 704 can be carried in locationinformationrequest. The locationinformationrequest can be used to indicate the second positioning type, such as one or more of RTOA, TOA, AOA, RSRP, RSRPP, path arrival time, path arrival angle, side positioning reference signal Doppler component, side positioning reference signal path Doppler component, target UE speed, etc. from the target UE to the initialing anchor UE.
在上述实施例中,在无网络覆盖场景下,由initialing anchor UE确定additional anchor UE,减少了target UE的ProSe直接发现过程以及target UE与additional anchor UE建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低target UE进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低target UE与additional anchor UE建立通信连接所需的信令开销,还可以减少定位时延。In the above embodiment, in the scenario without network coverage, the initialing anchor UE determines the additional anchor UE, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the target UE and the process of establishing a communication connection between the target UE and the additional anchor UE. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to establish a communication connection with the additional anchor UE, and can also reduce the positioning delay.
参见图8,图8为本申请实施例提供的又一种网络覆盖下的定位方法的流程示意图。如图8所示,该方法包括但不限于如下步骤:Referring to FIG8 , FIG8 is a flow chart of another positioning method under network coverage provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG8 , the method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
其中,图8中步骤801至步骤802分别与图6中步骤602至步骤603,图8中步骤804至步骤805分别与图5中步骤504至步骤505类似,图8中步骤811至步骤819分别与图6中步骤610至步骤618类似,区别在于:Among them, steps 801 to 802 in FIG. 8 are similar to steps 602 to 603 in FIG. 6 , steps 804 to 805 in FIG. 8 are similar to steps 504 to 505 in FIG. 5 , and steps 811 to 819 in FIG. 8 are similar to steps 610 to 618 in FIG. 6 , respectively, except that:
803、target UE向LMF发送定位请求,该定位请求用于请求对target UE进行定位测量。803. The target UE sends a positioning request to the LMF, where the positioning request is used to request positioning measurement for the target UE.
相应的,在一种可能的实施方式中,target UE可以向gNB发送该定位请求,gNB向AMF发送定位请求,AMF向LMF发送定位请求。Accordingly, in a possible implementation, the target UE may send the positioning request to the gNB, the gNB sends the positioning request to the AMF, and the AMF sends the positioning request to the LMF.
需要指出的,步骤802和步骤803之间没有必然的先后执行关系,如步骤802可以在步骤803之前或之后执行,或与步骤803同时执行。It should be noted that there is no necessary order of execution between step 802 and step 803 , such as step 802 can be executed before or after step 803 , or simultaneously with step 803 .
806、target UE生成第一标识信息。806. The target UE generates first identification information.
其中,关于第一标识信息可以参考图3步骤301相关描述,在此不加赘述。Among them, the first identification information can refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here.
807、target UE分别向initialing anchor UE和LMF发送第一标识信息。807. The target UE sends the first identification information to the initialing anchor UE and LMF respectively.
相应的,initialing anchor UE和LMF接收来自target UE的第一标识信息。Correspondingly, the initialing anchor UE and LMF receive the first identification information from the target UE.
808、LMF向additional anchor UE发送第一标识信息。808. LMF sends the first identification information to the additional anchor UE.
相应的,additional anchor UE接收来自LMF的第一标识信息。Correspondingly, the additional anchor UE receives the first identification information from the LMF.
809、target UE接收来自LMF的第三信息,第三信息用于通知LMF已完成additional anchor UE的确定。809. The target UE receives the third information from the LMF, and the third information is used to notify the LMF that the determination of the additional anchor UE has been completed.
相应的,LMF向target UE发送第三信息。可选的,第三信息可以携带在附加锚点UE响应(additional anchor UEresponse)消息中。Correspondingly, the LMF sends the third information to the target UE. Optionally, the third information can be carried in an additional anchor UE response message.
其中,步骤809可以是可选步骤。Among them, step 809 may be an optional step.
810、LMF接收来自target UE的第三标识信息。810. LMF receives the third identification information from the target UE.
相应的,target UE向LMF发送第三标识信息。需要指出的是,对于target UE来说,可以从initialing anchor UE获取第三标识信息。其中,第三标识信息可以参考图3步骤301相关描述,在此不加赘述。Correspondingly, the target UE sends the third identification information to the LMF. It should be noted that, for the target UE, the third identification information can be obtained from the initialing anchor UE. The third identification information can refer to the relevant description of step 301 in Figure 3, which is not repeated here.
在一种可能的实施方式中,步骤804中的第一信息可以与以下至少一项:807中的第一标识信息、步骤810中的第三标识信息等可以携带在同一消息或不同消息中,在此不做限定。可选的,807中的第一标识信息和步骤810中的第三标识信息可以携带在同一消息或不同消息中,在此不做限定。 In a possible implementation, the first information in step 804 may be carried in the same message or in different messages with at least one of the following: the first identification information in step 807, the third identification information in step 810, etc., which are not limited here. Optionally, the first identification information in 807 and the third identification information in step 810 may be carried in the same message or in different messages, which are not limited here.
820、target UE接收来自LMF的target UE的位置信息。820. The target UE receives the location information of the target UE from the LMF.
相应的,LMF向target UE发送target UE的位置信息。Correspondingly, LMF sends the location information of target UE to target UE.
在上述实施例中,在网络覆盖场景下,由LMF确定additional anchor UE,减少了target UE的ProSe直接发现过程以及target UE与additional anchor UE建立通信连接的过程。因此,这不仅可以降低target UE进行ProSe直接发现所需的信令开销,也可以降低target UE与additional anchor UE建立通信连接所需的信令开销,还可以减少定位时延。In the above embodiment, in the network coverage scenario, the additional anchor UE is determined by the LMF, which reduces the ProSe direct discovery process of the target UE and the process of establishing a communication connection between the target UE and the additional anchor UE. Therefore, this can not only reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to perform ProSe direct discovery, but also reduce the signaling overhead required for the target UE to establish a communication connection with the additional anchor UE, and also reduce the positioning delay.
需要指出的是,图6或图8所示实施例例如可以适用于V2X通信场景下模式(mode)1,图7所示实施例例如可以适用于V2X通信场景下mode2。It should be noted that the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 or FIG. 8 may be applicable to mode 1 in a V2X communication scenario, and the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 may be applicable to mode 2 in a V2X communication scenario.
上述主要从各个设备之间交互的角度对本申请提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,上述实现各设备为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The above mainly introduces the solution provided by the present application from the perspective of interaction between various devices. It is understandable that in order to realize the above functions, the above-mentioned implementation devices include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of various functions. It should be easily appreciated by those skilled in the art that, in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对target UE、initialing anchor UE、additional anchor UE或LMF进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中,上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。The embodiment of the present application can divide the target UE, initialing anchor UE, additional anchor UE or LMF into functional modules according to the above method example. For example, each functional module can be divided according to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical functional division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation.
参见图9,图9为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。该通信装置900可应用于上述图3至图8任意一个实施例所示的方法中,如图9所示,该通信装置900包括:处理模块901和收发模块902。处理模块901可以是一个或多个处理器,收发模块902可以是收发器或者通信接口。该通信装置可用于实现上述任一方法实施例中涉及target UE、initialing anchor UE、additional anchor UE或LMF,或用于实现上述任一方法实施例中涉及网元的功能。该网元或者网络功能既可以是硬件设备中的网络元件,也可以是在专用硬件上运行的软件功能,或者是平台(例如,云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能。可选的,该通信装置900还可以包括存储模块903,用于存储通信装置900的程序代码和数据。Referring to FIG. 9 , FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 900 can be applied to the method shown in any one of the embodiments of FIG. 3 to FIG. 8 above. As shown in FIG. 9 , the communication device 900 includes: a processing module 901 and a transceiver module 902. The processing module 901 can be one or more processors, and the transceiver module 902 can be a transceiver or a communication interface. The communication device can be used to implement the target UE, initialing anchor UE, additional anchor UE or LMF involved in any of the above method embodiments, or to implement the functions of the network element involved in any of the above method embodiments. The network element or network function can be a network element in a hardware device, a software function running on dedicated hardware, or a virtualized function instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud platform). Optionally, the communication device 900 can also include a storage module 903 for storing program code and data of the communication device 900.
一种实例,当该通信装置作为additional anchor UE或为应用于additional anchor UE中的芯片,并执行上述方法实施例中由additional anchor UE执行的步骤。收发模块902用于支持与initialing anchor UE、gNB、LMF等之间的通信,收发模块具体执行图3至图8所示任意一个实施例中由additional anchor UE执行的发送和/或接收的动作,例如支持additional anchor UE执行本文中所描述的技术的其他过程。处理模块901可用于支持通信装置900执行上述方法实施例中的处理动作,例如,支持additional anchor UE执行步骤303,和/或本文中所描述的技术的其他过程。In one embodiment, when the communication device serves as an additional anchor UE or a chip used in an additional anchor UE, and executes the steps performed by the additional anchor UE in the above method embodiment. The transceiver module 902 is used to support communication with the initialing anchor UE, gNB, LMF, etc. The transceiver module specifically performs the sending and/or receiving actions performed by the additional anchor UE in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8, such as supporting the additional anchor UE to perform other processes of the technology described in this document. The processing module 901 can be used to support the communication device 900 to perform the processing actions in the above method embodiment, for example, supporting the additional anchor UE to perform step 303, and/or other processes of the technology described in this document.
具体的,收发模块902,用于获取第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识target UE,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路;收发模块902,还用于根据第一标识信息,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号;处理模块901,用于根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第一测量结果。Specifically, the transceiver module 902 is used to obtain first identification information, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE; the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information; the processing module 901 is used to perform positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a first measurement result.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自initialing anchor UE或LMF的第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址;SCI还包括第四标识信息,在接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号时,收发模块902,用于当第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同,且第四标识信息与第三标识信息相同时,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive third identification information from the initialing anchor UE or LMF, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located; the SCI also includes fourth identification information. When receiving the side positioning reference signal from the target UE, the transceiver module 902 is used to receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE when the second identification information is the same as the first identification information and the fourth identification information is the same as the third identification information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自initialing anchor UE或LMF的第一测量请求,第一测量请求用于指示第一定位类型。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a first measurement request from an initialing anchor UE or LMF, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于向initialing anchor UE或LMF发送第一测量结果。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to send the first measurement result to the initialing anchor UE or LMF.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于向initialing anchor UE发送additional anchor UE的标识。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to send the identifier of the additional anchor UE to the initialing anchor UE.
一种实例,当该通信装置作为initialing anchor UE或为应用于initialing anchor UE中的芯片,并执行上述方法实施例中由initialing anchor UE执行的步骤。收发模块902用于支持与target UE、additional anchor UE、gNB、LMF等之间的通信,收发模块具体执行图3至图8所示任意一个实施例中由initialing anchor UE执 行的发送和/或接收的动作,例如支持initialing anchor UE执行本文中所描述的技术的其他过程。处理模块901可用于支持通信装置900执行上述方法实施例中的处理动作,例如,支持initialing anchor UE执行步骤503,和/或本文中所描述的技术的其他过程。In one example, when the communication device is used as an initialing anchor UE or a chip used in an initialing anchor UE, and executes the steps performed by the initialing anchor UE in the above method embodiment. The transceiver module 902 is used to support communication with the target UE, additional anchor UE, gNB, LMF, etc. The transceiver module specifically executes the steps performed by the initialing anchor UE in any of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8. The processing module 901 may be used to support the communication device 900 to perform the processing actions in the above method embodiment, for example, supporting the initialing anchor UE to perform step 503, and/or other processes of the technology described in this document.
示例性的,收发模块902,用于:接收来自target UE的第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于additional anchor UE进行定位测量,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路;向additional anchor UE发送第一标识信息。Exemplarily, the transceiver module 902 is used to: receive first identification information from a target UE, where the first identification information is used for an additional anchor UE to perform positioning measurement, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE; and send the first identification information to the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理模块901,还用于根据initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选设备之间的先验信息,从多个第一候选设备中确定至少一个additional anchor UE;其中,该先验信息包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备的位置、initialing anchor UE与第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系、第一候选设备对应的历史单播上下文信息或历史组播上下文信息、initialing anchor UE与第一候选设备之间的信道条件。In a possible implementation, the processing module 901 is further used to determine at least one additional anchor UE from multiple first candidate devices based on prior information between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate devices; wherein the prior information includes at least one of the following: the position of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device, historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自target UE的第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定additional anchor UE。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive first information from the target UE, where the first information is used to request determination of an additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自additional anchor UE的additional anchor UE的标识;向LMF发送第一标识信息、additional anchor UE的标识和第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive an additional anchor UE identifier from an additional anchor UE; and send first identification information, the additional anchor UE identifier and third identification information to the LMF, wherein the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自additional anchor UE的additional anchor UE的标识;向LMF发送第一标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE from the additional anchor UE; and send the first identifier information and the identifier of the additional anchor UE to the LMF.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自LMF的第一请求消息,第一请求消息用于请求additional anchor UE的标识。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a first request message from the LMF, where the first request message is used to request an identifier of an additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自additional anchor UE的additional anchor UE的标识;向target UE发送additional anchor UE的标识。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE from the additional anchor UE; and send the identifier of the additional anchor UE to the target UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:向additional anchor UE或target UE发送第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to send third identification information to the additional anchor UE or the target UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group where the initialing anchor UE is located, or the broadcast address.
在一种可能的实施方式中,处理模块901,还用于:根据第一标识信息,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号;根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第二测量结果。In a possible implementation, the processing module 901 is further used to: receive a sidetrack positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information; and perform positioning measurement according to the sidetrack positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于获取侧行定位参考信号对应的SCI;在根据第一标识信息,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号时,收发模块902,用于当SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。In one possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to obtain the SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal; when receiving the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information, the transceiver module 902 is used to receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE when the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自LMF的第二测量请求,第二测量请求用于指示第二定位类型。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further configured to receive a second measurement request from the LMF, where the second measurement request is used to indicate a second positioning type.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自additional anchor UE的第一测量结果;处理模块901,还用于根据第二测量结果和第一测量结果,确定target UE的位置信息;收发模块902,还用于向target UE发送target UE的位置信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to receive a first measurement result from an additional anchor UE; the processing module 901 is further used to determine the location information of the target UE based on the second measurement result and the first measurement result; the transceiver module 902 is further used to send the location information of the target UE to the target UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于向additional anchor UE发送第一测量请求,第一测量请求用于指示第一定位类型。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to send a first measurement request to the additional anchor UE, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type.
又示例性的,收发模块902,用于接收来自target UE的第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定additional anchor UE,additional anchor UE用于对target UE进行定位测量,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路;处理模块901,用于确定additional anchor UE。Also exemplarily, the transceiver module 902 is used to receive first information from the target UE, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE, and the additional anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE; the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在确定additional anchor UE时,处理模块901,用于根据initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选设备之间的先验信息,从多个第一候选设备中确定additional anchor UE;其中,先验信息包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备的位置、initialing anchor UE与第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系、第一候选设备对应的历史单播上下文信息或历史组播上下文信息、initialing anchor UE与第一候选设备之间的信道条件。In one possible implementation, when determining an additional anchor UE, the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UE from multiple first candidate devices based on prior information between the initialing anchor UE and the multiple first candidate devices; wherein the prior information includes at least one of the following: the position of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device, the historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自target UE的第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识target UE;向additional anchor UE发送第一标识信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive first identification information from the target UE, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE; and send the first identification information to an additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自additional anchor UE的additional anchor UE的标识;向LMF发送第一标识信息、additional anchor UE的标识和第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址。 In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive an additional anchor UE identifier from an additional anchor UE; send first identification information, the additional anchor UE identifier and third identification information to the LMF, wherein the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自additional anchor UE的additional anchor UE的标识;向LMF发送第一标识信息和additional anchor UE的标识。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE from the additional anchor UE; and send the first identifier information and the identifier of the additional anchor UE to the LMF.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自LMF的第一请求消息,第一请求消息用于请求additional anchor UE的标识。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a first request message from the LMF, where the first request message is used to request an identifier of an additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自additional anchor UE的additional anchor UE的标识;向target UE发送additional anchor UE的标识。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE from the additional anchor UE; and send the identifier of the additional anchor UE to the target UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于向additional anchor UE或target UE发送第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to send third identification information to the additional anchor UE or the target UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group where the initialing anchor UE is located, or the broadcast address.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于根据第一标识信息,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号;处理模块901,还用于根据侧行定位参考信号进行定位测量,以得到第二测量结果。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to receive a side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information; the processing module 901 is further used to perform positioning measurement according to the side positioning reference signal to obtain a second measurement result.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于获取侧行定位参考信号对应的SCI;在根据第一标识信息,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号时,收发模块902,用于当SCI包括的第二标识信息与第一标识信息相同时,接收来自target UE的侧行定位参考信号。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to obtain the SCI corresponding to the side positioning reference signal; when receiving the side positioning reference signal from the target UE according to the first identification information, the transceiver module 902 is used to receive the side positioning reference signal from the target UE when the second identification information included in the SCI is the same as the first identification information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自LMF的第二测量请求,第二测量请求用于指示第二定位类型。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further configured to receive a second measurement request from the LMF, where the second measurement request is used to indicate a second positioning type.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自additional anchor UE的第一测量结果;处理模块901,还用于根据第二测量结果和第一测量结果,确定target UE的位置信息;收发模块902,还用于向target UE发送target UE的位置信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to receive a first measurement result from an additional anchor UE; the processing module 901 is further used to determine the location information of the target UE based on the second measurement result and the first measurement result; the transceiver module 902 is further used to send the location information of the target UE to the target UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于向additional anchor UE发送第一测量请求,第一测量请求用于指示第一定位类型。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to send a first measurement request to the additional anchor UE, where the first measurement request is used to indicate a first positioning type.
一种实例,当该通信装置作为target UE或为应用于target UE中的芯片,并执行上述方法实施例中由target UE执行的步骤。收发模块902用于支持与initialing anchor UE、gNB、LMF等之间的通信,收发模块具体执行图3至图8所示任意一个实施例中由target UE执行的发送和/或接收的动作,例如支持target UE执行本文中所描述的技术的其他过程。处理模块901可用于支持通信装置900执行上述方法实施例中的处理动作,例如,支持target UE执行步骤501,和/或本文中所描述的技术的其他过程。In one embodiment, when the communication device acts as a target UE or a chip used in a target UE, and executes the steps performed by the target UE in the above method embodiment. The transceiver module 902 is used to support communication with the initialing anchor UE, gNB, LMF, etc. The transceiver module specifically performs the sending and/or receiving actions performed by the target UE in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8, such as supporting the target UE to perform other processes of the technology described in this document. The processing module 901 can be used to support the communication device 900 to perform the processing actions in the above method embodiment, for example, supporting the target UE to execute step 501, and/or other processes of the technology described in this document.
示例性的,处理模块901,用于生成第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于additional anchor UE进行定位测量,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路;收发模块902,用于向initialing anchor UE或LMF发送第一标识信息。Exemplarily, the processing module 901 is used to generate first identification information, where the first identification information is used for additional anchor UE to perform positioning measurement, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE; the transceiver module 902 is used to send the first identification information to the initialing anchor UE or LMF.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于向initialing anchor UE或LMF发送第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定additional anchor UE。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to send first information to the initialing anchor UE or LMF, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自initialing anchor UE的第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址;向LMF发送第三标识信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive third identification information from the initialing anchor UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or the broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located; and send the third identification information to the LMF.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自LMF的第二请求消息,第二请求消息用于请求第三标识信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive a second request message from the LMF, where the second request message is used to request third identification information.
在向initialing anchor UE发送第一信息的情况下,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自initialing anchor UE的additional anchor UE的标识和第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址;向LMF发送additional anchor UE的标识和第三标识信息。When sending the first information to the initialing anchor UE, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE and the third identifier information from the initialing anchor UE, where the third identifier information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or the broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located; and send the identifier of the additional anchor UE and the third identifier information to the LMF.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自LMF的第三请求消息,第三请求消息用于请求additional anchor UE的标识和第三标识信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a third request message from the LMF, where the third request message is used to request the identifier of the additional anchor UE and third identifier information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于发送侧行定位参考信号,侧行定位参考信号用于additional anchor UE和initialing anchor UE进行定位测量。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to send a side positioning reference signal, which is used for additional anchor UE and initialing anchor UE to perform positioning measurements.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自initialing anchor UE的target UE的位置信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive the location information of the target UE from the initialing anchor UE.
又示例性的,处理模块901,用于生成第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定additional anchor UE,additional anchor UE用于对target UE进行定位测量;收发模块902,用于向initialing anchor UE或LMF发送第一信息。 Also illustratively, the processing module 901 is used to generate first information, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE, where the additional anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE; the transceiver module 902 is used to send the first information to the initialing anchor UE or the LMF.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于向initialing anchor UE或LMF发送第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识target UE,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to send first identification information to the initialing anchor UE or LMF, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自initialing anchor UE的第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址;向LMF发送第三标识信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive third identification information from the initialing anchor UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or the broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located; and send the third identification information to the LMF.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自LMF的第二请求消息,第二请求消息用于请求第三标识信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive a second request message from the LMF, where the second request message is used to request third identification information.
在向initialing anchor UE发送第一信息的情况下,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自initialing anchor UE的additional anchor UE的标识和第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址;向LMF发送additional anchor UE的标识和第三标识信息。When sending the first information to the initialing anchor UE, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive the identifier of the additional anchor UE and the third identifier information from the initialing anchor UE, where the third identifier information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or the broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located; and send the identifier of the additional anchor UE and the third identifier information to the LMF.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自LMF的第三请求消息,第三请求消息用于请求additional anchor UE的标识和第三标识信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive a third request message from the LMF, where the third request message is used to request the identifier of the additional anchor UE and third identifier information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于发送侧行定位参考信号,侧行定位参考信号用于additional anchor UE和initialing anchor UE进行定位测量。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to send a side positioning reference signal, which is used for additional anchor UE and initialing anchor UE to perform positioning measurements.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自initialing anchor UE的target UE的位置信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to receive the location information of the target UE from the initialing anchor UE.
一种实例,当该通信装置作为LMF或为应用于LMF中的芯片,并执行上述方法实施例中由LMF执行的步骤。收发模块902用于支持与initialing anchor UE、target UE、additional anchor UE、gNB、LMF等之间的通信,收发模块具体执行图3至图8所示任意一个实施例中由LMF执行的发送和/或接收的动作,例如支持LMF执行本文中所描述的技术的其他过程。处理模块901可用于支持通信装置900执行上述方法实施例中的处理动作,例如,支持target UE执行步骤505,和/或本文中所描述的技术的其他过程。In one embodiment, when the communication device acts as an LMF or a chip used in an LMF, and executes the steps performed by the LMF in the above method embodiment. The transceiver module 902 is used to support communication with the initialing anchor UE, target UE, additional anchor UE, gNB, LMF, etc. The transceiver module specifically performs the sending and/or receiving actions performed by the LMF in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8, such as supporting the LMF to perform other processes of the technology described in this document. The processing module 901 can be used to support the communication device 900 to perform the processing actions in the above method embodiment, for example, supporting the target UE to perform step 505, and/or other processes of the technology described in this document.
示例性的,收发模块902,用于:接收来自target UE的第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识target UE,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路,additional anchor UE用于对target UE进行定位测量;向additional anchor UE发送第一标识信息。Exemplarily, the transceiver module 902 is used to: receive first identification information from a target UE, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE, where no communication link is established between the target UE and an additional anchor UE, and where the additional anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurements on the target UE; and send the first identification information to the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,用于接收来自target UE的第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定additional anchor UE;处理模块901,用于确定additional anchor UE。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is used to receive first information from the target UE, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE; the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自target UE的第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址,initialing anchor UE用于对target UE进行定位测量;处理模块901,还用于根据第三标识信息,确定initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选设备之间的先验信息;在确定additional anchor UE时,处理模块901,用于根据先验信息,从多个第一候选设备中确定additional anchor UE。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to receive third identification information from the target UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located, and the initialing anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE; the processing module 901 is further used to determine the prior information between the initialing anchor UE and multiple first candidate devices based on the third identification information; when determining additional anchor UEs, the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UEs from the multiple first candidate devices based on the prior information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,先验信息包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备的位置、initialing anchor UE与第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系、第一候选设备对应的历史单播上下文信息或历史组播上下文信息、initialing anchor UE与第一候选设备之间的信道条件。In one possible implementation, the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device, historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于向additional anchor UE发送第三标识信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is also used to send third identification information to an additional anchor UE.
又示例性的,收发模块902,用于接收来自target UE的第一信息,第一信息用于请求确定additional anchor UE,additional anchor UE用于对target UE进行定位测量;处理模块901,用于确定additional anchor UE。Also exemplarily, the transceiver module 902 is used to receive first information from the target UE, where the first information is used to request to determine an additional anchor UE, and the additional anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE; the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于接收来自target UE的第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于标识initialing anchor UE、initialing anchor UE所在的设备组或广播地址,initialing anchor UE用于对target UE进行定位测量;处理模块901,还用于根据第三标识信息,确定initialing anchor UE与多个第一候选设备之间的先验信息;在确定additional anchor UE时,处理模块901,用于根据先验信息,从多个第一候选设备中确定additional anchor UE。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to receive third identification information from the target UE, where the third identification information is used to identify the initialing anchor UE, the device group or broadcast address where the initialing anchor UE is located, and the initialing anchor UE is used to perform positioning measurement on the target UE; the processing module 901 is further used to determine the prior information between the initialing anchor UE and multiple first candidate devices based on the third identification information; when determining additional anchor UEs, the processing module 901 is used to determine the additional anchor UEs from the multiple first candidate devices based on the prior information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,先验信息包括以下至少一项:第一候选设备的位置、initialing anchor UE与第一候选设备之间的通信连接关系、第一候选设备对应的历史单播上下文信息或历史组播上下文信息、initialing anchor UE与第一候选设备之间的信道条件。In one possible implementation, the prior information includes at least one of the following: the location of the first candidate device, the communication connection relationship between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device, historical unicast context information or historical multicast context information corresponding to the first candidate device, and the channel condition between the initialing anchor UE and the first candidate device.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于向additional anchor UE发送第三标识信息。 In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver module 902 is further configured to send third identification information to the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,收发模块902,还用于:接收来自target UE的第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于标识target UE,target UE与additional anchor UE之间未建立通信链路;向additional anchor UE发送第一标识信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver module 902 is further used to: receive first identification information from the target UE, where the first identification information is used to identify the target UE, and no communication link is established between the target UE and the additional anchor UE; and send the first identification information to the additional anchor UE.
在一种可能的实施方式中,当target UE、initialing anchor UE、additional anchor UE或LMF为芯片时,收发模块902可以是通信接口、管脚或电路等。通信接口可用于输入待处理的数据至处理器,并可以向外输出处理器的处理结果。具体实现中,通信接口可以是通用输入输出(general purpose input output,GPIO)接口,可以和多个外围设备(如显示器(LCD)、摄像头(camara)、射频(radio frequency,RF)模块、天线等等)连接。通信接口通过总线与处理器相连。In a possible implementation, when the target UE, initialing anchor UE, additional anchor UE or LMF is a chip, the transceiver module 902 may be a communication interface, a pin or a circuit, etc. The communication interface may be used to input data to be processed to the processor, and may output the processing result of the processor to the outside. In a specific implementation, the communication interface may be a general purpose input output (GPIO) interface, which may be connected to multiple peripheral devices (such as a display (LCD), a camera (camara), a radio frequency (RF) module, an antenna, etc.). The communication interface is connected to the processor via a bus.
处理模块901可以是处理器,该处理器可以执行存储模块存储的计算机执行指令,以使该芯片执行图3-图8所示任意一个实施例涉及的方法。The processing module 901 may be a processor, which may execute computer-executable instructions stored in the storage module, so that the chip executes a method involved in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 8 .
进一步的,处理器可以包括控制器、运算器和寄存器。示例性的,控制器主要负责指令译码,并为指令对应的操作发出控制信号。运算器主要负责执行定点或浮点算数运算操作、移位操作以及逻辑操作等,也可以执行地址运算和转换。寄存器主要负责保存指令执行过程中临时存放的寄存器操作数和中间操作结果等。具体实现中,处理器的硬件架构可以是ASIC架构、无互锁管道阶段架构的微处理器(microprocessor without interlocked piped stages architecture,MIPS)架构、进阶精简指令集机器(advanced RISC machines,ARM)架构或者第二处理器(network processor,NP)架构等等。处理器可以是单核的,也可以是多核的。Furthermore, the processor may include a controller, an arithmetic unit and a register. Exemplarily, the controller is mainly responsible for decoding instructions and issuing control signals for operations corresponding to the instructions. The arithmetic unit is mainly responsible for performing fixed-point or floating-point arithmetic operations, shift operations, and logical operations, etc., and may also perform address operations and conversions. The register is mainly responsible for storing register operands and intermediate operation results temporarily stored during the execution of instructions. In a specific implementation, the hardware architecture of the processor may be an ASIC architecture, a microprocessor without interlocked piped stages architecture (MIPS) architecture, an advanced RISC machines (ARM) architecture, or a second processor (NP) architecture, etc. The processor may be single-core or multi-core.
该存储模块可以为该芯片内的存储模块,如寄存器、缓存等。存储模块也可以是位于芯片外部的存储模块,如ROM或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备、RAM等。The storage module may be a storage module within the chip, such as a register, a cache, etc. The storage module may also be a storage module located outside the chip, such as a ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, a RAM, etc.
需要说明的,处理器、接口各自对应的功能既可以通过硬件设计实现,也可以通过软件设计来实现,还可以通过软硬件结合的方式来实现,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the functions corresponding to the processor and the interface can be implemented through hardware design, software design, or a combination of hardware and software, and there is no limitation here.
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种简化的UE的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便,图10中,UE以手机作为例子,如图10所示,UE包括至少一个处理器,还可以包括射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。其中,处理器可用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,还可以用于对UE进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据等。该UE还可以包括存储器,存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据,这些涉及的程序可以在该通信装置出厂时即装载再存储器中,也可以在后期需要的时候再装载入存储器。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号,且天线为本申请实施例提供的天线。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是,有些种类的UE可以不具有输入输出装置。FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a simplified UE structure provided in an embodiment of the present application. For ease of understanding and illustration, in FIG10, UE takes a mobile phone as an example. As shown in FIG10, the UE includes at least one processor, and may also include a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input/output device. Among them, the processor may be used to process communication protocols and communication data, and may also be used to control the UE, execute software programs, process data of software programs, etc. The UE may also include a memory, which is mainly used to store software programs and data. These programs involved may be loaded into the memory when the communication device leaves the factory, or may be loaded into the memory when needed later. The radio frequency circuit is mainly used for conversion between baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing of radio frequency signals. The antenna is mainly used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves, and the antenna is the antenna provided in an embodiment of the present application. Input/output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of UE may not have input/output devices.
当需要发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到UE时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明,图10中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的UE产品中,可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置,也可以是与处理器集成在一起,本申请实施例对此不做限制。When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the RF circuit. The RF circuit performs RF processing on the baseband signal and then sends the RF signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the UE, the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor. The processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data. For ease of explanation, only one memory and processor are shown in Figure 10. In an actual UE product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc. The memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为UE的接收单元和发送单元(也可以统称为收发单元),将具有处理功能的处理器视为UE的处理单元。如图10所示,UE包括接收模块31、处理模块32和发送模块33。接收模块31也可以称为接收器、接收机、接收电路等,发送模块33也可以称为发送器、发射器、发射机、发射电路等。处理模块32也可以称为处理器、处理单板、处理装置等。In the embodiment of the present application, the antenna and the radio frequency circuit with transceiver functions can be regarded as the receiving unit and the sending unit of the UE (also collectively referred to as the transceiver unit), and the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit of the UE. As shown in Figure 10, the UE includes a receiving module 31, a processing module 32 and a sending module 33. The receiving module 31 can also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending module 33 can also be called a transmitter, a transmitter, a transmitter, a transmitting circuit, etc. The processing module 32 can also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing device, etc.
例如,处理模块32用于执行图3至图8所示任意一个实施例中target UE、initialing anchor UE或additional anchor UE的功能。For example, the processing module 32 is used to execute the functions of the target UE, initialing anchor UE or additional anchor UE in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8.
本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,通信装置包括至少一个处理器和存储器;其中,存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令;至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中的计算机程序或指令,使得图3至图8所示任意一个实施例中任一项所述的方法被执行。An embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes at least one processor and a memory; wherein the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions; and at least one processor is used to execute the computer programs or instructions in the memory, so that any method described in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8 is executed.
本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令被执行时,使计算机执行如图3至图8所示任意一个实施例中任一项所述的方法。An embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores computer instructions. When the computer instructions are executed, the computer executes any method in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 3 to 8.
本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码被计算机运行时,使得计算机执行如图3至图8所示任意一个实施例中任一项所述的方法。 An embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes: a computer program code, and when the computer program code is executed by a computer, the computer executes any one of the methods in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 8 .
本申请实施例提供一种芯片,该芯片与存储器耦合,用于读取并执行存储器中的程序指令,以使得芯片所在装置实现图3至图8所示任意一个实施例任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法。An embodiment of the present application provides a chip, which is coupled to a memory and is used to read and execute program instructions in the memory, so that a device where the chip is located implements the method described in any possible implementation of any embodiment shown in Figures 3 to 8.
上述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本申请实施例方案的目标。另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各网元单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以是两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件网元单元的形式实现。The units described above as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the embodiments of the present application. In addition, each network element unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into a processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software network element units.
上述集成的单元如果以软件网元单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上做出贡献的部分,或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,终端设备,云服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例上述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到各种等效的修改或替换,这些修改或替换都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。 If the above-mentioned integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software network element unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the part that essentially contributes to the technical solution of the present application, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a terminal device, a cloud server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the above-mentioned methods of each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code. The above is only a specific implementation method of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any technician familiar with the technical field can easily think of various equivalent modifications or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in the present application, and these modifications or replacements should be covered within the protection scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (37)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202310357984.8A CN118741680A (en) | 2023-03-30 | 2023-03-30 | A positioning method and device |
| CN202310357984.8 | 2023-03-30 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2024198973A1 true WO2024198973A1 (en) | 2024-10-03 |
Family
ID=92849888
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/081923 Pending WO2024198973A1 (en) | 2023-03-30 | 2024-03-15 | Positioning method and apparatus |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN118741680A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2024198973A1 (en) |
Citations (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2022194376A1 (en) * | 2021-03-18 | 2022-09-22 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Discovery procedure for sidelink positioning |
| CN115348606A (en) * | 2022-08-05 | 2022-11-15 | 中国信息通信研究院 | Method and equipment for reporting lateral positioning measurement |
-
2023
- 2023-03-30 CN CN202310357984.8A patent/CN118741680A/en active Pending
-
2024
- 2024-03-15 WO PCT/CN2024/081923 patent/WO2024198973A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2022194376A1 (en) * | 2021-03-18 | 2022-09-22 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Discovery procedure for sidelink positioning |
| CN115348606A (en) * | 2022-08-05 | 2022-11-15 | 中国信息通信研究院 | Method and equipment for reporting lateral positioning measurement |
Non-Patent Citations (2)
| Title |
|---|
| HUAWEI: "Discussion on sidelink positioning", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG3 MEETING #117BIS-E, R3-225647, 18 October 2022 (2022-10-18) * |
| OPPO: "Further discussion on sidelink positioning", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 #119BIS ELECTRONIC, R2-2209729, 31 October 2022 (2022-10-31) * |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN118741680A (en) | 2024-10-01 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CN113728693B (en) | Method for positioning a device | |
| US11598839B2 (en) | Methods for obtaining a location using neighbor awareness networking, NAN, as well as a corresponding system and NAN device | |
| EP3902317A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for directionally sending positioning reference signal | |
| JP2023501554A (en) | Method for positioning, terminal and network side equipment | |
| US20250008537A1 (en) | Sidelink signal positioning coordination based on user device capability | |
| CN116686323B (en) | A positioning method and related device | |
| JP7306407B2 (en) | USER EQUIPMENT, ELECTRONICS, METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS | |
| US20170188300A1 (en) | System, method and apparatus for sharing access data for FTM responders | |
| CN104010362B (en) | The method, apparatus and location equipment of positioning terminal position | |
| WO2022141184A1 (en) | Method for configuring uplink reference signal resource and related apparatus | |
| CN115942230B (en) | Method and device for determining position | |
| CN119948967A (en) | Combined one-to-many and many-to-one sidelink positioning | |
| CN115150937B (en) | Communication method and device | |
| WO2020037660A1 (en) | Data transmission method and apparatus | |
| JP2025526761A (en) | Method for identifying a sidelink positioning synchronization source | |
| CN111818552B (en) | Positioning method and device based on CU-DU framework | |
| WO2024198973A1 (en) | Positioning method and apparatus | |
| US20240276427A1 (en) | Determining candidate positioning anchor | |
| EP4391691A1 (en) | Positioning resource allocation | |
| WO2024208110A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| CN117917910A (en) | A communication method and device | |
| WO2025087003A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2023241671A1 (en) | Positioning broadcast configuration method and communication apparatus | |
| CN121142584A (en) | Measurement and reporting method and device | |
| WO2025060902A1 (en) | Data reporting method, data receiving method, and related device |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24777762 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |